1-877-275-7048|Free delivery — 48 states|20-year warranty on 12ga
In Stock & Ready to Ship | Lead Time: 4–8 Weeks | RTO from $49/mo

RV Covers For Sale

Shop 35+ prefab steel carport sizes from $1,195. Regular, A-Frame & vertical roof styles in 12 or 14 gauge. Free delivery & professional installation on every tubular steel order across all 48 states.

$1,195
Starting Price
35+
Sizes In Stock
20yr
Warranty — 12ga
48
States Covered
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock

Filter Carports

Filters
Product Vehicles
Filter by State

Showing 1241–1280 of 2330 resultsSorted by price: low to high

Slate blue steel garage with black roll-up door and windows under an evening lakeside sky

25×25 Two-Car Garage

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

25×25 Two-Car Garage | Steel and Stud, From $7,900

12

25×25 Two-Car Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$9,000$7,900SAVE $1,100
or $165/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings25×25Two-Car Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×25 Two-Car Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Homeowners outgrowing a single-bay garage pick this layout most often. Two full-size pickups (think two F-150s or a Tahoe plus a sedan) park side-by-side with about 18 inches between mirrors, leaving the front 4 feet.

You’re viewing:Two-Car Garage·Size25×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$7,900$9,000Save $1,100
or as low as $165/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×25
25×20
smaller
$7,400
25×25
this size
$7,900
25×30
longer
$9,500
30×25
wider
$9,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 625 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • 9′ Legs
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X25-TWO-CAR-GARAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 25×25 two-car garage.

25 feet wide × 25 feet long. Homeowners outgrowing a single-bay garage pick this layout most often.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area25′ × 25′ · 625 sq ft

Two-Car Garage layout.

Homeowners outgrowing a single-bay garage pick this layout most often. Two full-size pickups (think two F-150s or a Tahoe plus a sedan) park side-by-side with about 18 inches between mirrors, leaving the front 4 feet open for shelving or a workbench wall. A 16-foot wide roll-up door or two 25×25 doors are both popular configs.

💡 Pro tip:Two-Car Garage works well at 25×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×25 Two-Car Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Two-Car Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
625 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Two-Car Garage spec sheet.

Width25′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space625 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Two-Car Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday two-car garage
Everyday two-car garage
625 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a two-car garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtwo-car garage + seasonal storage
two-car garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×25 Two-Car Garage, what makes it different.

625sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$165/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×25 two-car garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $165/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×25?

625 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 25′ footprint with 625 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,000–$7,500 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Two-Car Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 25×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×25 Two-Car Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×25 Two-Car Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Two-Car Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,813+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Two-Car Garage also viewed:

🏡 25×25

Detached Workshop

25×25 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🎯 25×25

RV Cover / Carport

25×25 rv cover / carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Carport →

🌾 25×25

Hay Barn / Loafing Shed

25×25 hay barn / loafing shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn / Loafing Shed →

🏡 25×25

She Shed / Studio

25×25 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🏢 25×25

Contractor Shop

25×25 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 25×25

Man Cave / Hobby Garage

25×25 man cave / hobby garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / Hobby Garage →

🌾 25×25

Equipment Storage

25×25 equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage →

🏡 25×25

Garage with Lean-To

25×25 garage with lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Lean-To →

🏢 25×25

Pop-Up Storefront

25×25 pop-up storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pop-Up Storefront →

🎯 25×25

Boat & Trailer Cover

25×25 boat & trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Trailer Cover →

🏛️ 25×25

Community / Church Storage

25×25 community / church storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Church Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Two-Car Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 25×25 two-car garage cost?

A 25×25 two-car garage from Steel and Stud starts at $7,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $165/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×25 two-car garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud two-car garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×25 two-car garage?

Almost always for 625+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud two-car garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×25 two-car garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×25 two-car garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×25 two-car garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $165/month on a 25×25 two-car garage.

What warranty comes with the 25×25 two-car garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×25 two-car garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 25×25 two-car garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 25×25 two-car garage typically adds $5,000–$7,500 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Two-Car Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$7,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Slate blue steel garage with black roll-up door and windows under an evening lakeside sky

25×25 Two-Car Garage

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$7,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green metal workshop with black roll-up door framed by alpine peaks, steel building exterior

25×25 Detached Workshop

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

25×25 Detached Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $7,900

12

25×25 Detached Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$9,000$7,900SAVE $1,100
or $165/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings25×25Detached Workshop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×25 Detached Workshop, built for daily backyard use.

Tradespeople and serious DIY buyers run miter saws, table saws, and a welding bay inside this footprint. The 10-12 foot leg height clears a small lift or an overhead garage door opener. Two walk-in personnel doors plus.

You’re viewing:Detached Workshop·Size25×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$7,900$9,000Save $1,100
or as low as $165/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×25
25×20
smaller
$7,400
25×25
this size
$7,900
25×30
longer
$9,500
30×25
wider
$9,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 625 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Upgrade
  • 10′ Legs
  • Insulated Walls
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X25-DETACHED-WORKSHOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 25×25 detached workshop.

25 feet wide × 25 feet long. Tradespeople and serious DIY buyers run miter saws, table saws, and a welding bay inside this footprint.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP25′ × 25′ · 625 sq ft

Detached Workshop layout.

Tradespeople and serious DIY buyers run miter saws, table saws, and a welding bay inside this footprint. The 10-12 foot leg height clears a small lift or an overhead garage door opener. Two walk-in personnel doors plus three 25×25 windows is the typical shop spec, code-friendly natural light without sacrificing wall space.

💡 Pro tip:Detached Workshop works well at 25×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×25 Detached Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Detached Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
625 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Detached Workshop spec sheet.

Width25′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space625 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Detached Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday detached workshop
Everyday detached workshop
625 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a detached workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdetached workshop + seasonal storage
detached workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×25 Detached Workshop, what makes it different.

625sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$165/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×25 detached workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $165/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×25?

625 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 25′ footprint with 625 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,000–$7,500 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Detached Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 25×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×25 Detached Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×25 Detached Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Detached Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,813+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Detached Workshop also viewed:

🏡 25×25

Two-Car Garage

25×25 two-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Garage →

🎯 25×25

RV Cover / Carport

25×25 rv cover / carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Carport →

🌾 25×25

Hay Barn / Loafing Shed

25×25 hay barn / loafing shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn / Loafing Shed →

🏡 25×25

She Shed / Studio

25×25 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🏢 25×25

Contractor Shop

25×25 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 25×25

Man Cave / Hobby Garage

25×25 man cave / hobby garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / Hobby Garage →

🌾 25×25

Equipment Storage

25×25 equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage →

🏡 25×25

Garage with Lean-To

25×25 garage with lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Lean-To →

🏢 25×25

Pop-Up Storefront

25×25 pop-up storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pop-Up Storefront →

🎯 25×25

Boat & Trailer Cover

25×25 boat & trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Trailer Cover →

🏛️ 25×25

Community / Church Storage

25×25 community / church storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Church Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Detached Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 25×25 detached workshop cost?

A 25×25 detached workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $7,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $165/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×25 detached workshop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud detached workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×25 detached workshop?

Almost always for 625+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud detached workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×25 detached workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×25 detached workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×25 detached workshop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $165/month on a 25×25 detached workshop.

What warranty comes with the 25×25 detached workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×25 detached workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 25×25 detached workshop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 25×25 detached workshop typically adds $5,000–$7,500 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Detached Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$7,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green metal workshop with black roll-up door framed by alpine peaks, steel building exterior

25×25 Detached Workshop

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$7,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Brown metal carport RV cover sheltering a fifth wheel camper at sunset among shade trees

25×25 RV Cover / Carport

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

25×25 RV Cover / Carport | Steel and Stud, From $7,900

12

25×25 RV Cover / Carport
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$9,000$7,900SAVE $1,100
or $165/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings25×25RV Cover / Carport

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×25 RV Cover / Carport, built for hobby and recreational use.

RV owners with Class C motorhomes or fifth-wheels need 12-14 foot clearance. The 25-foot length covers most rigs end-to-end with a foot of overhang on each side. Open carport configs ship fastest. Add one or two.

You’re viewing:RV Cover / Carport·Size25×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$7,900$9,000Save $1,100
or as low as $165/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×25
25×20
smaller
$7,400
25×25
this size
$7,900
25×30
longer
$9,500
30×25
wider
$9,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 625 sq ft enclosed
  • 14′ Legs
  • Open Sides
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X25-RV-COVER-CARPORTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 25×25 rv cover / carport.

25 feet wide × 25 feet long. RV owners with Class C motorhomes or fifth-wheels need 12-14 foot clearance.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area25′ × 25′ · 625 sq ft

RV Cover / Carport layout.

RV owners with Class C motorhomes or fifth-wheels need 12-14 foot clearance. The 25-foot length covers most rigs end-to-end with a foot of overhang on each side. Open carport configs ship fastest. Add one or two enclosed sides later if you want partial wind protection without losing airflow.

💡 Pro tip:RV Cover / Carport works well at 25×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×25 RV Cover / Carport in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV Cover / Carport.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
625 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV Cover / Carport spec sheet.

Width25′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space625 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV Cover / Carport.

DAILY USEEveryday rv cover / carport
Everyday rv cover / carport
625 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv cover / carport.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv cover / carport + seasonal storage
rv cover / carport + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×25 RV Cover / Carport, what makes it different.

625sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$165/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×25 rv cover / carport is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $165/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×25?

625 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 25′ footprint with 625 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,000–$7,500 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV Cover / Carport shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 25×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×25 RV Cover / Carport buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×25 RV Cover / Carport

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV Cover / Carport · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,813+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV Cover / Carport also viewed:

🏡 25×25

Two-Car Garage

25×25 two-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Garage →

🏡 25×25

Detached Workshop

25×25 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🌾 25×25

Hay Barn / Loafing Shed

25×25 hay barn / loafing shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn / Loafing Shed →

🏡 25×25

She Shed / Studio

25×25 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🏢 25×25

Contractor Shop

25×25 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 25×25

Man Cave / Hobby Garage

25×25 man cave / hobby garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / Hobby Garage →

🌾 25×25

Equipment Storage

25×25 equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage →

🏡 25×25

Garage with Lean-To

25×25 garage with lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Lean-To →

🏢 25×25

Pop-Up Storefront

25×25 pop-up storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pop-Up Storefront →

🎯 25×25

Boat & Trailer Cover

25×25 boat & trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Trailer Cover →

🏛️ 25×25

Community / Church Storage

25×25 community / church storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Church Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV Cover / Carport questions, answered.

How much does a 25×25 rv cover / carport cost?

A 25×25 rv cover / carport from Steel and Stud starts at $7,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $165/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×25 rv cover / carport price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud rv cover / carport ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×25 rv cover / carport?

Almost always for 625+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv cover / carport different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×25 rv cover / carport need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×25 rv cover / carport delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×25 rv cover / carport without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $165/month on a 25×25 rv cover / carport.

What warranty comes with the 25×25 rv cover / carport?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×25 rv cover / carport in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 25×25 rv cover / carport for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a rv cover / carport to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your RV Cover / Carport quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$7,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Brown metal carport RV cover sheltering a fifth wheel camper at sunset among shade trees

25×25 RV Cover / Carport

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$7,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal shed with open front loafing shelter design on an autumn pasture with board fencing

25×25 Hay Barn / Loafing Shed

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

25×25 Hay Barn / Loafing Shed | Steel and Stud, From $8,550

12

25×25 Hay Barn / Loafing Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$9,750$8,550SAVE $1,200
or $178/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings25×25Hay Barn / Loafing Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×25 Hay Barn / Loafing Shed, built for farm and ranch demands.

Hobby farmers stack 8-12 round bales under cover with room left over for a tractor pass-through. The vertical roof sheds snow and rain straight off without pooling on horizontal seams. Open one or both 25-foot sides for.

You’re viewing:Hay Barn / Loafing Shed·Size25×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$8,550$9,750Save $1,200
or as low as $178/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×25
25×20
smaller
$8,050
25×25
this size
$8,550
25×30
longer
$10,150
30×25
wider
$10,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 625 sq ft enclosed
  • 12′ Legs
  • Vertical Roof
  • Open Gable
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X25-HAY-BARN-LOAFINGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 25×25 hay barn / loafing shed.

25 feet wide × 25 feet long. Hobby farmers stack 8-12 round bales under cover with room left over for a tractor pass-through.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP25′ × 25′ · 625 sq ft

Hay Barn / Loafing Shed layout.

Hobby farmers stack 8-12 round bales under cover with room left over for a tractor pass-through. The vertical roof sheds snow and rain straight off without pooling on horizontal seams. Open one or both 25-foot sides for equipment access; partial walls block prevailing wind without trapping humidity.

💡 Pro tip:Hay Barn / Loafing Shed works well at 25×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×25 Hay Barn / Loafing Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hay Barn / Loafing Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
625 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hay Barn / Loafing Shed spec sheet.

Width25′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space625 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hay Barn / Loafing Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday hay barn / loafing shed
Everyday hay barn / loafing shed
625 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hay barn / loafing shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhay barn / loafing shed + seasonal storage
hay barn / loafing shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×25 Hay Barn / Loafing Shed, what makes it different.

625sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$178/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×25 hay barn / loafing shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $178/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×25?

625 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 25′ footprint with 625 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,000–$7,500 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hay Barn / Loafing Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 25×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×25 Hay Barn / Loafing Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×25 Hay Barn / Loafing Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hay Barn / Loafing Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,813+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hay Barn / Loafing Shed also viewed:

🏡 25×25

Two-Car Garage

25×25 two-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Garage →

🏡 25×25

Detached Workshop

25×25 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🎯 25×25

RV Cover / Carport

25×25 rv cover / carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Carport →

🏡 25×25

She Shed / Studio

25×25 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🏢 25×25

Contractor Shop

25×25 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 25×25

Man Cave / Hobby Garage

25×25 man cave / hobby garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / Hobby Garage →

🌾 25×25

Equipment Storage

25×25 equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage →

🏡 25×25

Garage with Lean-To

25×25 garage with lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Lean-To →

🏢 25×25

Pop-Up Storefront

25×25 pop-up storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pop-Up Storefront →

🎯 25×25

Boat & Trailer Cover

25×25 boat & trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Trailer Cover →

🏛️ 25×25

Community / Church Storage

25×25 community / church storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Church Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hay Barn / Loafing Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 25×25 hay barn / loafing shed cost?

A 25×25 hay barn / loafing shed from Steel and Stud starts at $8,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $178/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×25 hay barn / loafing shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hay barn / loafing shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×25 hay barn / loafing shed?

Almost always for 625+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hay barn / loafing shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×25 hay barn / loafing shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×25 hay barn / loafing shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×25 hay barn / loafing shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $178/month on a 25×25 hay barn / loafing shed.

What warranty comes with the 25×25 hay barn / loafing shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×25 hay barn / loafing shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 25×25 hay barn / loafing shed stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Hay Barn / Loafing Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$8,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal shed with open front loafing shelter design on an autumn pasture with board fencing

25×25 Hay Barn / Loafing Shed

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$8,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Cozy craft studio inside a metal building with sewing table, yarn shelves, and floral armchair

25×25 She Shed / Studio

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

25×25 She Shed / Studio | Steel and Stud, From $7,900

12

25×25 She Shed / Studio
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$9,000$7,900SAVE $1,100
or $165/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings25×25She Shed / Studio

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×25 She Shed / Studio, built for daily backyard use.

Buyers converting the build into an art studio, yoga space, or home office spec lower 8-10 foot legs to keep the interior cozy and easier to heat. Wainscoting in a contrasting color plus three storefront windows gives.

You’re viewing:She Shed / Studio·Size25×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$7,900$9,000Save $1,100
or as low as $165/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×25
25×20
smaller
$7,400
25×25
this size
$7,900
25×30
longer
$9,500
30×25
wider
$9,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 625 sq ft enclosed
  • 8′ Legs
  • Wainscoting
  • Storefront Windows
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X25-SHE-SHED-STUDIOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 25×25 she shed / studio.

25 feet wide × 25 feet long. Buyers converting the build into an art studio, yoga space, or home office spec lower 8-10 foot legs to keep the interior cozy and easier to heat.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑25′ × 25′ · 625 ground + loft

She Shed / Studio layout.

Buyers converting the build into an art studio, yoga space, or home office spec lower 8-10 foot legs to keep the interior cozy and easier to heat. Wainscoting in a contrasting color plus three storefront windows gives the exterior a residential look that satisfies most HOA boards.

💡 Pro tip:She Shed / Studio works well at 25×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×25 She Shed / Studio in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your She Shed / Studio.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
625 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

She Shed / Studio spec sheet.

Width25′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space625 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use She Shed / Studio.

DAILY USEEveryday she shed / studio
Everyday she shed / studio
625 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a she shed / studio.
STORAGE OVERFLOWshe shed / studio + seasonal storage
she shed / studio + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×25 She Shed / Studio, what makes it different.

625sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$165/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×25 she shed / studio is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $165/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×25?

625 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 25′ footprint with 625 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,000–$7,500 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from She Shed / Studio shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 25×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×25 She Shed / Studio buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×25 She Shed / Studio

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your She Shed / Studio · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,813+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose She Shed / Studio also viewed:

🏡 25×25

Two-Car Garage

25×25 two-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Garage →

🏡 25×25

Detached Workshop

25×25 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🎯 25×25

RV Cover / Carport

25×25 rv cover / carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Carport →

🌾 25×25

Hay Barn / Loafing Shed

25×25 hay barn / loafing shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn / Loafing Shed →

🏢 25×25

Contractor Shop

25×25 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 25×25

Man Cave / Hobby Garage

25×25 man cave / hobby garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / Hobby Garage →

🌾 25×25

Equipment Storage

25×25 equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage →

🏡 25×25

Garage with Lean-To

25×25 garage with lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Lean-To →

🏢 25×25

Pop-Up Storefront

25×25 pop-up storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pop-Up Storefront →

🎯 25×25

Boat & Trailer Cover

25×25 boat & trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Trailer Cover →

🏛️ 25×25

Community / Church Storage

25×25 community / church storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Church Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

She Shed / Studio questions, answered.

How much does a 25×25 she shed / studio cost?

A 25×25 she shed / studio from Steel and Stud starts at $7,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $165/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×25 she shed / studio price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud she shed / studio ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×25 she shed / studio?

Almost always for 625+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud she shed / studio different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×25 she shed / studio need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×25 she shed / studio delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×25 she shed / studio without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $165/month on a 25×25 she shed / studio.

What warranty comes with the 25×25 she shed / studio?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×25 she shed / studio in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 25×25 she shed / studio add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 25×25 she shed / studio typically adds $5,000–$7,500 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your She Shed / Studio quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$7,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Cozy craft studio inside a metal building with sewing table, yarn shelves, and floral armchair

25×25 She Shed / Studio

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$7,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal workshop with white roll up door and contractor pickup on gravel drive

25×25 Contractor Shop

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

25×25 Contractor Shop | Steel and Stud, From $9,750

12

25×25 Contractor Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$11,100$9,750SAVE $1,350
or $203/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings25×25Contractor Shop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×25 Contractor Shop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Plumbers, electricians, and HVAC contractors use the 625 sq ft as a base of operations. One bay holds the work van, the other holds parts shelving and a small office partition. The 12-foot leg height lets a 25×25.

You’re viewing:Contractor Shop·Size25×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,750$11,100Save $1,350
or as low as $203/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×25
25×20
smaller
$9,250
25×25
this size
$9,750
25×30
longer
$11,350
30×25
wider
$11,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 625 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 12′ Legs
  • 10×10 Roll-Up
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X25-CONTRACTOR-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 25×25 contractor shop.

25 feet wide × 25 feet long. Plumbers, electricians, and HVAC contractors use the 625 sq ft as a base of operations.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP25′ × 25′ · 625 sq ft

Contractor Shop layout.

Plumbers, electricians, and HVAC contractors use the 625 sq ft as a base of operations. One bay holds the work van, the other holds parts shelving and a small office partition. The 12-foot leg height lets a 25×25 roll-up door clear a service body truck. 12-gauge framing is standard for daily commercial use.

💡 Pro tip:Contractor Shop works well at 25×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×25 Contractor Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Contractor Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
625 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contractor Shop spec sheet.

Width25′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space625 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Contractor Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday contractor shop
Everyday contractor shop
625 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a contractor shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcontractor shop + seasonal storage
contractor shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×25 Contractor Shop, what makes it different.

625sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$203/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×25 contractor shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $203/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×25?

625 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 25′ footprint with 625 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,000–$7,500 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Contractor Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 25×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×25 Contractor Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×25 Contractor Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Contractor Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,813+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Contractor Shop also viewed:

🏡 25×25

Two-Car Garage

25×25 two-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Garage →

🏡 25×25

Detached Workshop

25×25 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🎯 25×25

RV Cover / Carport

25×25 rv cover / carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Carport →

🌾 25×25

Hay Barn / Loafing Shed

25×25 hay barn / loafing shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn / Loafing Shed →

🏡 25×25

She Shed / Studio

25×25 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🏡 25×25

Man Cave / Hobby Garage

25×25 man cave / hobby garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / Hobby Garage →

🌾 25×25

Equipment Storage

25×25 equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage →

🏡 25×25

Garage with Lean-To

25×25 garage with lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Lean-To →

🏢 25×25

Pop-Up Storefront

25×25 pop-up storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pop-Up Storefront →

🎯 25×25

Boat & Trailer Cover

25×25 boat & trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Trailer Cover →

🏛️ 25×25

Community / Church Storage

25×25 community / church storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Church Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Contractor Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 25×25 contractor shop cost?

A 25×25 contractor shop from Steel and Stud starts at $9,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $203/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×25 contractor shop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud contractor shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×25 contractor shop?

Almost always for 625+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud contractor shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×25 contractor shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×25 contractor shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×25 contractor shop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $203/month on a 25×25 contractor shop.

What warranty comes with the 25×25 contractor shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×25 contractor shop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 25×25 contractor shop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Contractor Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal workshop with white roll up door and contractor pickup on gravel drive

25×25 Contractor Shop

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Barn red steel building with tall open bay and white roll-up door beside an autumn lake

25×25 Man Cave / Hobby Garage

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

25×25 Man Cave / Hobby Garage | Steel and Stud, From $7,900

12

25×25 Man Cave / Hobby Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$9,000$7,900SAVE $1,100
or $165/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings25×25Man Cave / Hobby Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×25 Man Cave / Hobby Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Classic-car restorers and motorcycle hobbyists love this size. One project car on the lift, one daily driver beside it, and a back wall for the tool chest and parts washer. R-19 batt insulation plus a mini-split keeps.

You’re viewing:Man Cave / Hobby Garage·Size25×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$7,900$9,000Save $1,100
or as low as $165/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×25
25×20
smaller
$7,400
25×25
this size
$7,900
25×30
longer
$9,500
30×25
wider
$9,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 625 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 9′ Legs
  • French Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X25-MAN-CAVE-HOBBY-GBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 25×25 man cave / hobby garage.

25 feet wide × 25 feet long. Classic-car restorers and motorcycle hobbyists love this size.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area25′ × 25′ · 625 sq ft

Man Cave / Hobby Garage layout.

Classic-car restorers and motorcycle hobbyists love this size. One project car on the lift, one daily driver beside it, and a back wall for the tool chest and parts washer. R-19 batt insulation plus a mini-split keeps it usable year-round. Add a 25×25 roll-up plus a French door for finished-space curb appeal.

💡 Pro tip:Man Cave / Hobby Garage works well at 25×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×25 Man Cave / Hobby Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Man Cave / Hobby Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
625 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Man Cave / Hobby Garage spec sheet.

Width25′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space625 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Man Cave / Hobby Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday man cave / hobby garage
Everyday man cave / hobby garage
625 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a man cave / hobby garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWman cave / hobby garage + seasonal storage
man cave / hobby garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×25 Man Cave / Hobby Garage, what makes it different.

625sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$165/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×25 man cave / hobby garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $165/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×25?

625 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 25′ footprint with 625 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,000–$7,500 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Man Cave / Hobby Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 25×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×25 Man Cave / Hobby Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×25 Man Cave / Hobby Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Man Cave / Hobby Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,813+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Man Cave / Hobby Garage also viewed:

🏡 25×25

Two-Car Garage

25×25 two-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Garage →

🏡 25×25

Detached Workshop

25×25 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🎯 25×25

RV Cover / Carport

25×25 rv cover / carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Carport →

🌾 25×25

Hay Barn / Loafing Shed

25×25 hay barn / loafing shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn / Loafing Shed →

🏡 25×25

She Shed / Studio

25×25 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🏢 25×25

Contractor Shop

25×25 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🌾 25×25

Equipment Storage

25×25 equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage →

🏡 25×25

Garage with Lean-To

25×25 garage with lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Lean-To →

🏢 25×25

Pop-Up Storefront

25×25 pop-up storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pop-Up Storefront →

🎯 25×25

Boat & Trailer Cover

25×25 boat & trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Trailer Cover →

🏛️ 25×25

Community / Church Storage

25×25 community / church storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Church Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Man Cave / Hobby Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 25×25 man cave / hobby garage cost?

A 25×25 man cave / hobby garage from Steel and Stud starts at $7,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $165/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×25 man cave / hobby garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud man cave / hobby garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×25 man cave / hobby garage?

Almost always for 625+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud man cave / hobby garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×25 man cave / hobby garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×25 man cave / hobby garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×25 man cave / hobby garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $165/month on a 25×25 man cave / hobby garage.

What warranty comes with the 25×25 man cave / hobby garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×25 man cave / hobby garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 25×25 man cave / hobby garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 25×25 man cave / hobby garage typically adds $5,000–$7,500 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Man Cave / Hobby Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$7,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Barn red steel building with tall open bay and white roll-up door beside an autumn lake

25×25 Man Cave / Hobby Garage

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$7,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Blue metal barn with open equipment bay and wood post framing in a valley pasture

25×25 Equipment Storage

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

25×25 Equipment Storage | Steel and Stud, From $8,550

12

25×25 Equipment Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$9,750$8,550SAVE $1,200
or $178/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings25×25Equipment Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×25 Equipment Storage, built for farm and ranch demands.

Rural property owners park a compact tractor (think Kubota L-series), a zero-turn mower, and an ATV under one roof with implements hanging on the wall. The 12-foot peak clears a tractor with a roll bar and front-end.

You’re viewing:Equipment Storage·Size25×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$8,550$9,750Save $1,200
or as low as $178/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×25
25×20
smaller
$8,050
25×25
this size
$8,550
25×30
longer
$10,150
30×25
wider
$10,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 625 sq ft enclosed
  • 12′ Legs
  • Ground Anchors
  • Open Front
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X25-EQUIPMENT-STORAGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 25×25 equipment storage.

25 feet wide × 25 feet long. Rural property owners park a compact tractor (think Kubota L-series), a zero-turn mower, and an ATV under one roof with implements hanging on the wall.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack25′ × 25′ · 625 sq ft shop

Equipment Storage layout.

Rural property owners park a compact tractor (think Kubota L-series), a zero-turn mower, and an ATV under one roof with implements hanging on the wall. The 12-foot peak clears a tractor with a roll bar and front-end loader. Gravel floor with auger ground anchors keeps the install cost low.

💡 Pro tip:Equipment Storage works well at 25×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×25 Equipment Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
625 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment Storage spec sheet.

Width25′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space625 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment storage
Everyday equipment storage
625 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment storage + seasonal storage
equipment storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×25 Equipment Storage, what makes it different.

625sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$178/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×25 equipment storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $178/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×25?

625 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 25′ footprint with 625 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,000–$7,500 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 25×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×25 Equipment Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×25 Equipment Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Equipment Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,813+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment Storage also viewed:

🏡 25×25

Two-Car Garage

25×25 two-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Garage →

🏡 25×25

Detached Workshop

25×25 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🎯 25×25

RV Cover / Carport

25×25 rv cover / carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Carport →

🌾 25×25

Hay Barn / Loafing Shed

25×25 hay barn / loafing shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn / Loafing Shed →

🏡 25×25

She Shed / Studio

25×25 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🏢 25×25

Contractor Shop

25×25 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 25×25

Man Cave / Hobby Garage

25×25 man cave / hobby garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / Hobby Garage →

🏡 25×25

Garage with Lean-To

25×25 garage with lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Lean-To →

🏢 25×25

Pop-Up Storefront

25×25 pop-up storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pop-Up Storefront →

🎯 25×25

Boat & Trailer Cover

25×25 boat & trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Trailer Cover →

🏛️ 25×25

Community / Church Storage

25×25 community / church storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Church Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 25×25 equipment storage cost?

A 25×25 equipment storage from Steel and Stud starts at $8,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $178/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×25 equipment storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud equipment storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×25 equipment storage?

Almost always for 625+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×25 equipment storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×25 equipment storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×25 equipment storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $178/month on a 25×25 equipment storage.

What warranty comes with the 25×25 equipment storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×25 equipment storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 25×25 equipment storage stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$8,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Blue metal barn with open equipment bay and wood post framing in a valley pasture

25×25 Equipment Storage

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$8,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Cream metal carport with green trim sheltering a truck and SUV in a mountain meadow

25×25 Garage with Lean-To

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

25×25 Garage with Lean-To | Steel and Stud, From $7,900

12

25×25 Garage with Lean-To
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$9,000$7,900SAVE $1,100
or $165/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings25×25Garage with Lean-To

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×25 Garage with Lean-To, built for daily backyard use.

Add a 10-foot single-sided lean-to and you’ve got a 25×25 enclosed garage plus 250 sq ft of covered outdoor work area for firewood, kayaks, or a riding mower. The lean-to ties into the main roofline and ships.

You’re viewing:Garage with Lean-To·Size25×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$7,900$9,000Save $1,100
or as low as $165/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×25
25×20
smaller
$7,400
25×25
this size
$7,900
25×30
longer
$9,500
30×25
wider
$9,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 625 sq ft enclosed
  • 10′ Lean-To
  • 10′ Legs
  • Combo Build
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X25-GARAGE-LEAN-TOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 25×25 garage with lean-to.

25 feet wide × 25 feet long. Add a 10-foot single-sided lean-to and you’ve got a 25×25 enclosed garage plus 250 sq ft of covered outdoor work area for firewood, kayaks, or a riding mower.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area25′ × 25′ · 625 sq ft

Garage with Lean-To layout.

Add a 10-foot single-sided lean-to and you’ve got a 25×25 enclosed garage plus 250 sq ft of covered outdoor work area for firewood, kayaks, or a riding mower. The lean-to ties into the main roofline and ships pre-engineered as one unit. Total covered footprint: 875 sq ft.

💡 Pro tip:Garage with Lean-To works well at 25×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×25 Garage with Lean-To in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Garage with Lean-To.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
625 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Garage with Lean-To spec sheet.

Width25′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space625 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Garage with Lean-To.

DAILY USEEveryday garage with lean-to
Everyday garage with lean-to
625 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a garage with lean-to.
STORAGE OVERFLOWgarage with lean-to + seasonal storage
garage with lean-to + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×25 Garage with Lean-To, what makes it different.

625sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$165/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×25 garage with lean-to is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $165/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×25?

625 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 25′ footprint with 625 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,000–$7,500 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Garage with Lean-To shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 25×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×25 Garage with Lean-To buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×25 Garage with Lean-To

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Garage with Lean-To · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,813+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Garage with Lean-To also viewed:

🏡 25×25

Two-Car Garage

25×25 two-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Garage →

🏡 25×25

Detached Workshop

25×25 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🎯 25×25

RV Cover / Carport

25×25 rv cover / carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Carport →

🌾 25×25

Hay Barn / Loafing Shed

25×25 hay barn / loafing shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn / Loafing Shed →

🏡 25×25

She Shed / Studio

25×25 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🏢 25×25

Contractor Shop

25×25 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 25×25

Man Cave / Hobby Garage

25×25 man cave / hobby garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / Hobby Garage →

🌾 25×25

Equipment Storage

25×25 equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage →

🏢 25×25

Pop-Up Storefront

25×25 pop-up storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pop-Up Storefront →

🎯 25×25

Boat & Trailer Cover

25×25 boat & trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Trailer Cover →

🏛️ 25×25

Community / Church Storage

25×25 community / church storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Church Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Garage with Lean-To questions, answered.

How much does a 25×25 garage with lean-to cost?

A 25×25 garage with lean-to from Steel and Stud starts at $7,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $165/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×25 garage with lean-to price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud garage with lean-to ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×25 garage with lean-to?

Almost always for 625+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud garage with lean-to different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×25 garage with lean-to need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×25 garage with lean-to delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×25 garage with lean-to without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $165/month on a 25×25 garage with lean-to.

What warranty comes with the 25×25 garage with lean-to?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×25 garage with lean-to in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 25×25 garage with lean-to add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 25×25 garage with lean-to typically adds $5,000–$7,500 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Garage with Lean-To quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$7,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Cream metal carport with green trim sheltering a truck and SUV in a mountain meadow

25×25 Garage with Lean-To

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$7,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan steel garage with open roll-up door storing a boat beside a mountain lake

25×25 Boat & Trailer Cover

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

25×25 Boat & Trailer Cover | Steel and Stud, From $7,900

12

25×25 Boat & Trailer Cover
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$9,000$7,900SAVE $1,100
or $165/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings25×25Boat & Trailer Cover

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×25 Boat & Trailer Cover, built for hobby and recreational use.

A 22-foot bowrider on its trailer fits comfortably with room for the tow vehicle alongside or a kayak rack down the sidewall. Vertical-roof config keeps lake-effect snow off the gel coat. Lake-region buyers in MI, MN.

You’re viewing:Boat & Trailer Cover·Size25×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$7,900$9,000Save $1,100
or as low as $165/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×25
25×20
smaller
$7,400
25×25
this size
$7,900
25×30
longer
$9,500
30×25
wider
$9,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 625 sq ft enclosed
  • 4:12 Pitch
  • 12′ Legs
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X25-BOAT-TRAILER-COVBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 25×25 boat & trailer cover.

25 feet wide × 25 feet long. A 22-foot bowrider on its trailer fits comfortably with room for the tow vehicle alongside or a kayak rack down the sidewall.

TruckTrailer25′ × 25′ · 625 sq ft pass-through

Boat & Trailer Cover layout.

A 22-foot bowrider on its trailer fits comfortably with room for the tow vehicle alongside or a kayak rack down the sidewall. Vertical-roof config keeps lake-effect snow off the gel coat. Lake-region buyers in MI, MN, NY, and ME usually upgrade to 4:12 pitch for heavy-snow shedding.

💡 Pro tip:Boat & Trailer Cover works well at 25×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×25 Boat & Trailer Cover in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Boat & Trailer Cover.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
625 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Boat & Trailer Cover spec sheet.

Width25′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space625 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Boat & Trailer Cover.

DAILY USEEveryday boat & trailer cover
Everyday boat & trailer cover
625 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a boat & trailer cover.
STORAGE OVERFLOWboat & trailer cover + seasonal storage
boat & trailer cover + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×25 Boat & Trailer Cover, what makes it different.

625sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$165/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×25 boat & trailer cover is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $165/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×25?

625 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 25′ footprint with 625 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,000–$7,500 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Boat & Trailer Cover shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 25×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×25 Boat & Trailer Cover buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×25 Boat & Trailer Cover

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Boat & Trailer Cover · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,813+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Boat & Trailer Cover also viewed:

🏡 25×25

Two-Car Garage

25×25 two-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Garage →

🏡 25×25

Detached Workshop

25×25 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🎯 25×25

RV Cover / Carport

25×25 rv cover / carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Carport →

🌾 25×25

Hay Barn / Loafing Shed

25×25 hay barn / loafing shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn / Loafing Shed →

🏡 25×25

She Shed / Studio

25×25 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🏢 25×25

Contractor Shop

25×25 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 25×25

Man Cave / Hobby Garage

25×25 man cave / hobby garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / Hobby Garage →

🌾 25×25

Equipment Storage

25×25 equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage →

🏡 25×25

Garage with Lean-To

25×25 garage with lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Lean-To →

🏢 25×25

Pop-Up Storefront

25×25 pop-up storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pop-Up Storefront →

🏛️ 25×25

Community / Church Storage

25×25 community / church storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Church Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Boat & Trailer Cover questions, answered.

How much does a 25×25 boat & trailer cover cost?

A 25×25 boat & trailer cover from Steel and Stud starts at $7,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $165/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×25 boat & trailer cover price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud boat & trailer cover ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×25 boat & trailer cover?

Almost always for 625+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud boat & trailer cover different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×25 boat & trailer cover need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×25 boat & trailer cover delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×25 boat & trailer cover without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $165/month on a 25×25 boat & trailer cover.

What warranty comes with the 25×25 boat & trailer cover?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×25 boat & trailer cover in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 25×25 boat & trailer cover for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a boat & trailer cover to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Boat & Trailer Cover quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$7,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan steel garage with open roll-up door storing a boat beside a mountain lake

25×25 Boat & Trailer Cover

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$7,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal building kit community hall with covered porch as guests arrive at golden hour

25×25 Community / Church Storage

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

25×25 Community / Church Storage | Steel and Stud, From $9,850

12

25×25 Community / Church Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$11,250$9,850SAVE $1,400
or $205/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings25×25Community / Church Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×25 Community / Church Storage, engineered to code for assembly use.

Churches, fire auxiliaries, and HOAs use the 625 sq ft for folding-table storage, holiday decor bins, lawn equipment, and an event trailer. Two 25×25 roll-up doors on opposite walls allow drive-through access. Galvalume.

You’re viewing:Community / Church Storage·Size25×25·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,850$11,250Save $1,400
or as low as $205/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×25
25×20
smaller
$9,350
25×25
this size
$9,850
25×30
longer
$11,450
30×25
wider
$11,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 625 sq ft enclosed
  • Galvalume
  • 9′ Legs
  • Drive-Through
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X25-COMMUNITY-CHURCHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 25×25 community / church storage.

25 feet wide × 25 feet long. Churches, fire auxiliaries, and HOAs use the 625 sq ft for folding-table storage, holiday decor bins, lawn equipment, and an event trailer.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE25′ × 25′ · 625 sq ft

Community / Church Storage layout.

Churches, fire auxiliaries, and HOAs use the 625 sq ft for folding-table storage, holiday decor bins, lawn equipment, and an event trailer. Two 25×25 roll-up doors on opposite walls allow drive-through access. Galvalume panels in a neutral color keep it inconspicuous on shared property.

💡 Pro tip:Community / Church Storage works well at 25×25, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×25 Community / Church Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Community / Church Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
625 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×25 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Community / Church Storage spec sheet.

Width25′
Length25′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space625 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Community / Church Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday community / church storage
Everyday community / church storage
625 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a community / church storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommunity / church storage + seasonal storage
community / church storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×25 Community / Church Storage, what makes it different.

625sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$205/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×25 community / church storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $205/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×25?

625 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 25′ footprint with 625 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,000–$7,500 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Community / Church Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×25 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 25×25 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×25 Community / Church Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×25 Community / Church Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Community / Church Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×26×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,813+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Community / Church Storage also viewed:

🏡 25×25

Two-Car Garage

25×25 two-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Garage →

🏡 25×25

Detached Workshop

25×25 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🎯 25×25

RV Cover / Carport

25×25 rv cover / carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover / Carport →

🌾 25×25

Hay Barn / Loafing Shed

25×25 hay barn / loafing shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn / Loafing Shed →

🏡 25×25

She Shed / Studio

25×25 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🏢 25×25

Contractor Shop

25×25 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 25×25

Man Cave / Hobby Garage

25×25 man cave / hobby garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / Hobby Garage →

🌾 25×25

Equipment Storage

25×25 equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$8,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage →

🏡 25×25

Garage with Lean-To

25×25 garage with lean-to configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Lean-To →

🏢 25×25

Pop-Up Storefront

25×25 pop-up storefront configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pop-Up Storefront →

🎯 25×25

Boat & Trailer Cover

25×25 boat & trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$7,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat & Trailer Cover →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Community / Church Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 25×25 community / church storage cost?

A 25×25 community / church storage from Steel and Stud starts at $9,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $205/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×25 community / church storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud community / church storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×25 community / church storage?

Almost always for 625+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud community / church storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×25 community / church storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×25 community / church storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×25 community / church storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $205/month on a 25×25 community / church storage.

What warranty comes with the 25×25 community / church storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×25 community / church storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 25×25 community / church storage pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Community / Church Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal building kit community hall with covered porch as guests arrive at golden hour

25×25 Community / Church Storage

625 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

25′ x 25′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×25 steel building delivers 625 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Brown metal garage with black sectional door and black trim among lakeside pines

22×40 Two-Car Detached Garage

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

22×40 Two-Car Detached Garage | Steel and Stud, From $13,000

12

22×40 Two-Car Detached Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$14,800$13,000SAVE $1,800
or $271/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings22×40Two-Car Detached Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×40 Two-Car Detached Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Homeowners who want a true two-car detached garage pick the 22×40 over the 22×40 for the extra shoulder room between vehicles. Two F-150s park side-by-side with door-swing clearance, and the 40-ft length leaves a 10-ft.

You’re viewing:Two-Car Detached Garage·Size22×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,000$14,800Save $1,800
or as low as $271/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×40
22×36
smaller
$11,700
22×40
this size
$13,000
22×45
longer
$14,600
24×40
wider
$14,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 880 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • Free Install
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X40-TWO-CAR-DETACHEDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 22×40 two-car detached garage.

22 feet wide × 40 feet long. Homeowners who want a true two-car detached garage pick the 22×40 over the 22×40 for the extra shoulder room between vehicles.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area22′ × 40′ · 880 sq ft

Two-Car Detached Garage layout.

Homeowners who want a true two-car detached garage pick the 22×40 over the 22×40 for the extra shoulder room between vehicles. Two F-150s park side-by-side with door-swing clearance, and the 40-ft length leaves a 10-ft workbench bay at the rear wall. Two 22×40 roll-up doors on the gable end is the most-ordered config.

💡 Pro tip:Two-Car Detached Garage works well at 22×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×40 Two-Car Detached Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Two-Car Detached Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
880 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Two-Car Detached Garage spec sheet.

Width22′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space880 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Two-Car Detached Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday two-car detached garage
Everyday two-car detached garage
880 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a two-car detached garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtwo-car detached garage + seasonal storage
two-car detached garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×40 Two-Car Detached Garage, what makes it different.

880sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$271/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×40 two-car detached garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $271/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×40?

880 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 40′ footprint with 880 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,040–$10,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Two-Car Detached Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 22×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×40 Two-Car Detached Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×40 Two-Car Detached Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Two-Car Detached Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,960+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Two-Car Detached Garage also viewed:

🎯 22×40

RV Cover with Workshop Bay

22×40 rv cover with workshop bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Workshop Bay →

🏡 22×40

Hobby Workshop

22×40 hobby workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Workshop →

🌾 22×40

Hay and Equipment Barn

22×40 hay and equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay and Equipment Barn →

🏢 22×40

Contractor Shop

22×40 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 22×40

Man Cave or She Shed

22×40 man cave or she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave or She Shed →

🌾 22×40

Horse Barn (4-Stall)

22×40 horse barn (4-stall) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn (4-Stall) →

🏢 22×40

Auto Repair Shop

22×40 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🏭 22×40

Storage Building

22×40 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 22×40

Boat and Toy Storage

22×40 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

🏛️ 22×40

Community or Church Building

22×40 community or church building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community or Church Building →

🏡 22×40

Garage with Loft

22×40 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Two-Car Detached Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 22×40 two-car detached garage cost?

A 22×40 two-car detached garage from Steel and Stud starts at $13,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $271/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×40 two-car detached garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud two-car detached garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×40 two-car detached garage?

Almost always for 880+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud two-car detached garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×40 two-car detached garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×40 two-car detached garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×40 two-car detached garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $271/month on a 22×40 two-car detached garage.

What warranty comes with the 22×40 two-car detached garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×40 two-car detached garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 22×40 two-car detached garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 22×40 two-car detached garage typically adds $7,040–$10,560 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Two-Car Detached Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$13,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Brown metal garage with black sectional door and black trim among lakeside pines

22×40 Two-Car Detached Garage

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Black RV metal cover with open sides sheltering a Class A motorhome on a concrete pad

22×40 RV Cover with Workshop Bay

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

22×40 RV Cover with Workshop Bay | Steel and Stud, From $13,000

12

22×40 RV Cover with Workshop Bay
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$14,800$13,000SAVE $1,800
or $271/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings22×40RV Cover with Workshop Bay

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×40 RV Cover with Workshop Bay, built for hobby and recreational use.

RV owners running a Class A or fifth-wheel pick the 22×40 because the 40-ft length covers most travel rigs end-to-end with airflow at the gable. Bump leg height to 13 ft for the AC unit and slide-outs. Many buyers fully.

You’re viewing:RV Cover with Workshop Bay·Size22×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,000$14,800Save $1,800
or as low as $271/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×40
22×36
smaller
$11,700
22×40
this size
$13,000
22×45
longer
$14,600
24×40
wider
$14,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 880 sq ft enclosed
  • 13′ Legs
  • Hurricane Rated
  • Open Front Gable
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X40-RV-COVER-WORKSHOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 22×40 rv cover with workshop bay.

22 feet wide × 40 feet long. RV owners running a Class A or fifth-wheel pick the 22×40 because the 40-ft length covers most travel rigs end-to-end with airflow at the gable.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP22′ × 40′ · 880 sq ft

RV Cover with Workshop Bay layout.

RV owners running a Class A or fifth-wheel pick the 22×40 because the 40-ft length covers most travel rigs end-to-end with airflow at the gable. Bump leg height to 13 ft for the AC unit and slide-outs. Many buyers fully enclose three sides for tool storage and leave the front gable open as a drive-through carport.

💡 Pro tip:RV Cover with Workshop Bay works well at 22×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×40 RV Cover with Workshop Bay in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV Cover with Workshop Bay.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
880 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV Cover with Workshop Bay spec sheet.

Width22′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space880 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV Cover with Workshop Bay.

DAILY USEEveryday rv cover with workshop bay
Everyday rv cover with workshop bay
880 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv cover with workshop bay.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv cover with workshop bay + seasonal storage
rv cover with workshop bay + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×40 RV Cover with Workshop Bay, what makes it different.

880sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$271/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×40 rv cover with workshop bay is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $271/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×40?

880 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 40′ footprint with 880 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,040–$10,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV Cover with Workshop Bay shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 22×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×40 RV Cover with Workshop Bay buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×40 RV Cover with Workshop Bay

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV Cover with Workshop Bay · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,960+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV Cover with Workshop Bay also viewed:

🏡 22×40

Two-Car Detached Garage

22×40 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 22×40

Hobby Workshop

22×40 hobby workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Workshop →

🌾 22×40

Hay and Equipment Barn

22×40 hay and equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay and Equipment Barn →

🏢 22×40

Contractor Shop

22×40 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 22×40

Man Cave or She Shed

22×40 man cave or she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave or She Shed →

🌾 22×40

Horse Barn (4-Stall)

22×40 horse barn (4-stall) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn (4-Stall) →

🏢 22×40

Auto Repair Shop

22×40 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🏭 22×40

Storage Building

22×40 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 22×40

Boat and Toy Storage

22×40 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

🏛️ 22×40

Community or Church Building

22×40 community or church building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community or Church Building →

🏡 22×40

Garage with Loft

22×40 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV Cover with Workshop Bay questions, answered.

How much does a 22×40 rv cover with workshop bay cost?

A 22×40 rv cover with workshop bay from Steel and Stud starts at $13,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $271/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×40 rv cover with workshop bay price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud rv cover with workshop bay ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×40 rv cover with workshop bay?

Almost always for 880+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv cover with workshop bay different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×40 rv cover with workshop bay need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×40 rv cover with workshop bay delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×40 rv cover with workshop bay without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $271/month on a 22×40 rv cover with workshop bay.

What warranty comes with the 22×40 rv cover with workshop bay?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×40 rv cover with workshop bay in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 22×40 rv cover with workshop bay for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a rv cover with workshop bay to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your RV Cover with Workshop Bay quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$13,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Black RV metal cover with open sides sheltering a Class A motorhome on a concrete pad

22×40 RV Cover with Workshop Bay

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Copper-toned metal workshop with black wainscoting and roll-up door in autumn countryside

22×40 Hobby Workshop

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

22×40 Hobby Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $13,000

12

22×40 Hobby Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$14,800$13,000SAVE $1,800
or $271/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings22×40Hobby Workshop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×40 Hobby Workshop, built for daily backyard use.

Tradespeople and weekend builders order this size as a dedicated workshop with no vehicle parking. The 22-ft clear span fits a full table-saw outfeed, lumber rack, and assembly bench across the width. Add a 36-inch.

You’re viewing:Hobby Workshop·Size22×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,000$14,800Save $1,800
or as low as $271/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×40
22×36
smaller
$11,700
22×40
this size
$13,000
22×45
longer
$14,600
24×40
wider
$14,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 880 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 4 Windows
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X40-HOBBY-WORKSHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 22×40 hobby workshop.

22 feet wide × 40 feet long. Tradespeople and weekend builders order this size as a dedicated workshop with no vehicle parking.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP22′ × 40′ · 880 sq ft

Hobby Workshop layout.

Tradespeople and weekend builders order this size as a dedicated workshop with no vehicle parking. The 22-ft clear span fits a full table-saw outfeed, lumber rack, and assembly bench across the width. Add a 36-inch walk-in door, four 22×40 windows, and an R-19 batt insulation package for year-round shop work.

💡 Pro tip:Hobby Workshop works well at 22×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×40 Hobby Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hobby Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
880 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hobby Workshop spec sheet.

Width22′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space880 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hobby Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday hobby workshop
Everyday hobby workshop
880 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hobby workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhobby workshop + seasonal storage
hobby workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×40 Hobby Workshop, what makes it different.

880sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$271/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×40 hobby workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $271/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×40?

880 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 40′ footprint with 880 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,040–$10,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hobby Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 22×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×40 Hobby Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×40 Hobby Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hobby Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,960+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hobby Workshop also viewed:

🏡 22×40

Two-Car Detached Garage

22×40 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🎯 22×40

RV Cover with Workshop Bay

22×40 rv cover with workshop bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Workshop Bay →

🌾 22×40

Hay and Equipment Barn

22×40 hay and equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay and Equipment Barn →

🏢 22×40

Contractor Shop

22×40 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 22×40

Man Cave or She Shed

22×40 man cave or she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave or She Shed →

🌾 22×40

Horse Barn (4-Stall)

22×40 horse barn (4-stall) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn (4-Stall) →

🏢 22×40

Auto Repair Shop

22×40 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🏭 22×40

Storage Building

22×40 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 22×40

Boat and Toy Storage

22×40 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

🏛️ 22×40

Community or Church Building

22×40 community or church building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community or Church Building →

🏡 22×40

Garage with Loft

22×40 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hobby Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 22×40 hobby workshop cost?

A 22×40 hobby workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $13,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $271/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×40 hobby workshop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hobby workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×40 hobby workshop?

Almost always for 880+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hobby workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×40 hobby workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×40 hobby workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×40 hobby workshop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $271/month on a 22×40 hobby workshop.

What warranty comes with the 22×40 hobby workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×40 hobby workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 22×40 hobby workshop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 22×40 hobby workshop typically adds $7,040–$10,560 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Hobby Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$13,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Copper-toned metal workshop with black wainscoting and roll-up door in autumn countryside

22×40 Hobby Workshop

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Open equipment shed steel structure sheltering a green tractor, baler, and red plow

22×40 Hay and Equipment Barn

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

22×40 Hay and Equipment Barn | Steel and Stud, From $13,650

12

22×40 Hay and Equipment Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$15,550$13,650SAVE $1,900
or $284/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings22×40Hay and Equipment Barn

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×40 Hay and Equipment Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Hobby farmers and rural property owners use the 22×40 metal barn for round-bale storage, a tractor bay, and a small tack room partition. Twelve to sixteen feet of leg height clears stacked round bales and a cab tractor.

You’re viewing:Hay and Equipment Barn·Size22×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,650$15,550Save $1,900
or as low as $284/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×40
22×36
smaller
$12,350
22×40
this size
$13,650
22×45
longer
$15,250
24×40
wider
$14,850
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 880 sq ft enclosed
  • 16′ Legs
  • Sliding Barn Door
  • Open 3-Sided
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X40-HAY-EQUIPMENT-BABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 22×40 hay and equipment barn.

22 feet wide × 40 feet long. Hobby farmers and rural property owners use the 22×40 metal barn for round-bale storage, a tractor bay, and a small tack room partition.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP22′ × 40′ · 880 sq ft

Hay and Equipment Barn layout.

Hobby farmers and rural property owners use the 22×40 metal barn for round-bale storage, a tractor bay, and a small tack room partition. Twelve to sixteen feet of leg height clears stacked round bales and a cab tractor. Many farms order it as a three-sided open barn with a sliding barn door on the closed gable.

💡 Pro tip:Hay and Equipment Barn works well at 22×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×40 Hay and Equipment Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hay and Equipment Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
880 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hay and Equipment Barn spec sheet.

Width22′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space880 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hay and Equipment Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday hay and equipment barn
Everyday hay and equipment barn
880 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hay and equipment barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhay and equipment barn + seasonal storage
hay and equipment barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×40 Hay and Equipment Barn, what makes it different.

880sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$284/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×40 hay and equipment barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $284/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×40?

880 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 40′ footprint with 880 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,040–$10,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hay and Equipment Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 22×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×40 Hay and Equipment Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×40 Hay and Equipment Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hay and Equipment Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,960+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hay and Equipment Barn also viewed:

🏡 22×40

Two-Car Detached Garage

22×40 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🎯 22×40

RV Cover with Workshop Bay

22×40 rv cover with workshop bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Workshop Bay →

🏡 22×40

Hobby Workshop

22×40 hobby workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Workshop →

🏢 22×40

Contractor Shop

22×40 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 22×40

Man Cave or She Shed

22×40 man cave or she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave or She Shed →

🌾 22×40

Horse Barn (4-Stall)

22×40 horse barn (4-stall) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn (4-Stall) →

🏢 22×40

Auto Repair Shop

22×40 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🏭 22×40

Storage Building

22×40 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 22×40

Boat and Toy Storage

22×40 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

🏛️ 22×40

Community or Church Building

22×40 community or church building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community or Church Building →

🏡 22×40

Garage with Loft

22×40 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hay and Equipment Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 22×40 hay and equipment barn cost?

A 22×40 hay and equipment barn from Steel and Stud starts at $13,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $284/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×40 hay and equipment barn price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hay and equipment barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×40 hay and equipment barn?

Almost always for 880+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hay and equipment barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×40 hay and equipment barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×40 hay and equipment barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×40 hay and equipment barn without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $284/month on a 22×40 hay and equipment barn.

What warranty comes with the 22×40 hay and equipment barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×40 hay and equipment barn in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 22×40 hay and equipment barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Hay and Equipment Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$13,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Open equipment shed steel structure sheltering a green tractor, baler, and red plow

22×40 Hay and Equipment Barn

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Barn red metal building with white roll up door beside steel stock and equipment yard

22×40 Contractor Shop

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

22×40 Contractor Shop | Steel and Stud, From $14,850

12

22×40 Contractor Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$16,950$14,850SAVE $2,100
or $309/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings22×40Contractor Shop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×40 Contractor Shop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

HVAC, plumbing, and electrical contractors order this size as a fleet shop with one bay for a service van, one for tool storage, and a partitioned office at the rear. The 12-gauge frame upgrade is standard for.

You’re viewing:Contractor Shop·Size22×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$14,850$16,950Save $2,100
or as low as $309/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×40
22×36
smaller
$13,550
22×40
this size
$14,850
22×45
longer
$16,450
24×40
wider
$16,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 880 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 12×12 Door
  • Commercial Cert
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X40-CONTRACTOR-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 22×40 contractor shop.

22 feet wide × 40 feet long. HVAC, plumbing, and electrical contractors order this size as a fleet shop with one bay for a service van, one for tool storage, and a partitioned office at the rear.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP22′ × 40′ · 880 sq ft

Contractor Shop layout.

HVAC, plumbing, and electrical contractors order this size as a fleet shop with one bay for a service van, one for tool storage, and a partitioned office at the rear. The 12-gauge frame upgrade is standard for commercial use, and a 22×40 roll-up door lets you pull a box truck or skid-steer inside.

💡 Pro tip:Contractor Shop works well at 22×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×40 Contractor Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Contractor Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
880 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contractor Shop spec sheet.

Width22′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space880 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Contractor Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday contractor shop
Everyday contractor shop
880 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a contractor shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcontractor shop + seasonal storage
contractor shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×40 Contractor Shop, what makes it different.

880sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$309/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×40 contractor shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $309/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×40?

880 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 40′ footprint with 880 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,040–$10,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Contractor Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 22×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×40 Contractor Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×40 Contractor Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Contractor Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,960+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Contractor Shop also viewed:

🏡 22×40

Two-Car Detached Garage

22×40 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🎯 22×40

RV Cover with Workshop Bay

22×40 rv cover with workshop bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Workshop Bay →

🏡 22×40

Hobby Workshop

22×40 hobby workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Workshop →

🌾 22×40

Hay and Equipment Barn

22×40 hay and equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay and Equipment Barn →

🏡 22×40

Man Cave or She Shed

22×40 man cave or she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave or She Shed →

🌾 22×40

Horse Barn (4-Stall)

22×40 horse barn (4-stall) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn (4-Stall) →

🏢 22×40

Auto Repair Shop

22×40 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🏭 22×40

Storage Building

22×40 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 22×40

Boat and Toy Storage

22×40 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

🏛️ 22×40

Community or Church Building

22×40 community or church building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community or Church Building →

🏡 22×40

Garage with Loft

22×40 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Contractor Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 22×40 contractor shop cost?

A 22×40 contractor shop from Steel and Stud starts at $14,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $309/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×40 contractor shop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud contractor shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×40 contractor shop?

Almost always for 880+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud contractor shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×40 contractor shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×40 contractor shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×40 contractor shop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $309/month on a 22×40 contractor shop.

What warranty comes with the 22×40 contractor shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×40 contractor shop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 22×40 contractor shop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Contractor Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$14,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Barn red metal building with white roll up door beside steel stock and equipment yard

22×40 Contractor Shop

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$14,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Barn red prefab metal building garage apartment with monitor roof, cupola, and exterior stairs

22×40 Man Cave or She Shed

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

22×40 Man Cave or She Shed | Steel and Stud, From $13,000

12

22×40 Man Cave or She Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$14,800$13,000SAVE $1,800
or $271/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings22×40Man Cave or She Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×40 Man Cave or She Shed, built for daily backyard use.

When the use case is hangout space, not storage, buyers spec the 22×40 with full insulation, four large windows, French doors, and wainscoting in a contrasting trim color. Eight hundred eighty square feet runs a pool.

You’re viewing:Man Cave or She Shed·Size22×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,000$14,800Save $1,800
or as low as $271/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×40
22×36
smaller
$11,700
22×40
this size
$13,000
22×45
longer
$14,600
24×40
wider
$14,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 880 sq ft enclosed
  • French Doors
  • Wainscoting
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X40-MAN-CAVE-SHE-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 22×40 man cave or she shed.

22 feet wide × 40 feet long. When the use case is hangout space, not storage, buyers spec the 22×40 with full insulation, four large windows, French doors, and wainscoting in a contrasting trim color.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑22′ × 40′ · 880 ground + loft

Man Cave or She Shed layout.

When the use case is hangout space, not storage, buyers spec the 22×40 with full insulation, four large windows, French doors, and wainscoting in a contrasting trim color. Eight hundred eighty square feet runs a pool table, bar area, lounge zone, and half-bath with room for a dart wall.

💡 Pro tip:Man Cave or She Shed works well at 22×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×40 Man Cave or She Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Man Cave or She Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
880 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Man Cave or She Shed spec sheet.

Width22′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space880 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Man Cave or She Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday man cave or she shed
Everyday man cave or she shed
880 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a man cave or she shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWman cave or she shed + seasonal storage
man cave or she shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×40 Man Cave or She Shed, what makes it different.

880sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$271/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×40 man cave or she shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $271/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×40?

880 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 40′ footprint with 880 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,040–$10,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Man Cave or She Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 22×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×40 Man Cave or She Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×40 Man Cave or She Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Man Cave or She Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,960+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Man Cave or She Shed also viewed:

🏡 22×40

Two-Car Detached Garage

22×40 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🎯 22×40

RV Cover with Workshop Bay

22×40 rv cover with workshop bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Workshop Bay →

🏡 22×40

Hobby Workshop

22×40 hobby workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Workshop →

🌾 22×40

Hay and Equipment Barn

22×40 hay and equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay and Equipment Barn →

🏢 22×40

Contractor Shop

22×40 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🌾 22×40

Horse Barn (4-Stall)

22×40 horse barn (4-stall) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn (4-Stall) →

🏢 22×40

Auto Repair Shop

22×40 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🏭 22×40

Storage Building

22×40 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 22×40

Boat and Toy Storage

22×40 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

🏛️ 22×40

Community or Church Building

22×40 community or church building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community or Church Building →

🏡 22×40

Garage with Loft

22×40 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Man Cave or She Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 22×40 man cave or she shed cost?

A 22×40 man cave or she shed from Steel and Stud starts at $13,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $271/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×40 man cave or she shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud man cave or she shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×40 man cave or she shed?

Almost always for 880+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud man cave or she shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×40 man cave or she shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×40 man cave or she shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×40 man cave or she shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $271/month on a 22×40 man cave or she shed.

What warranty comes with the 22×40 man cave or she shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×40 man cave or she shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 22×40 man cave or she shed add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 22×40 man cave or she shed typically adds $7,040–$10,560 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Man Cave or She Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$13,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Barn red prefab metal building garage apartment with monitor roof, cupola, and exterior stairs

22×40 Man Cave or She Shed

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green prefab metal building horse barn with cupola, open bay, and grazing horse

22×40 Horse Barn (4-Stall)

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

22×40 Horse Barn (4-Stall) | Steel and Stud, From $13,650

12

22×40 Horse Barn (4-Stall)
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$15,550$13,650SAVE $1,900
or $284/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings22×40Horse Barn (4-Stall)

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×40 Horse Barn (4-Stall), built for farm and ranch demands.

Equestrian buyers configure the 22×40 as a four-stall horse barn with a 10-ft center aisle and 22×40 stalls down both 40-ft walls. The 22-ft width is the minimum for a true center-aisle barn. Add a sliding barn door on.

You’re viewing:Horse Barn (4-Stall)·Size22×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,650$15,550Save $1,900
or as low as $284/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×40
22×36
smaller
$12,350
22×40
this size
$13,650
22×45
longer
$15,250
24×40
wider
$14,850
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 880 sq ft enclosed
  • 4 Stalls
  • Center Aisle
  • Ridge Vent
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X40-HORSE-BARN-4-STABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 22×40 horse barn (4-stall).

22 feet wide × 40 feet long. Equestrian buyers configure the 22×40 as a four-stall horse barn with a 10-ft center aisle and 22×40 stalls down both 40-ft walls.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP22′ × 40′ · 880 sq ft

Horse Barn (4-Stall) layout.

Equestrian buyers configure the 22×40 as a four-stall horse barn with a 10-ft center aisle and 22×40 stalls down both 40-ft walls. The 22-ft width is the minimum for a true center-aisle barn. Add a sliding barn door on each gable, two Dutch doors per stall, and ridge venting for airflow.

💡 Pro tip:Horse Barn (4-Stall) works well at 22×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×40 Horse Barn (4-Stall) in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Horse Barn (4-Stall).

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
880 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Horse Barn (4-Stall) spec sheet.

Width22′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space880 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Horse Barn (4-Stall).

DAILY USEEveryday horse barn (4-stall)
Everyday horse barn (4-stall)
880 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a horse barn (4-stall).
STORAGE OVERFLOWhorse barn (4-stall) + seasonal storage
horse barn (4-stall) + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×40 Horse Barn (4-Stall), what makes it different.

880sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$284/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×40 horse barn (4-stall) is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $284/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×40?

880 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 40′ footprint with 880 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,040–$10,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Horse Barn (4-Stall) shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 22×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×40 Horse Barn (4-Stall) buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×40 Horse Barn (4-Stall)

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Horse Barn (4-Stall) · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,960+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Horse Barn (4-Stall) also viewed:

🏡 22×40

Two-Car Detached Garage

22×40 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🎯 22×40

RV Cover with Workshop Bay

22×40 rv cover with workshop bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Workshop Bay →

🏡 22×40

Hobby Workshop

22×40 hobby workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Workshop →

🌾 22×40

Hay and Equipment Barn

22×40 hay and equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay and Equipment Barn →

🏢 22×40

Contractor Shop

22×40 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 22×40

Man Cave or She Shed

22×40 man cave or she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave or She Shed →

🏢 22×40

Auto Repair Shop

22×40 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🏭 22×40

Storage Building

22×40 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 22×40

Boat and Toy Storage

22×40 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

🏛️ 22×40

Community or Church Building

22×40 community or church building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community or Church Building →

🏡 22×40

Garage with Loft

22×40 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Horse Barn (4-Stall) questions, answered.

How much does a 22×40 horse barn (4-stall) cost?

A 22×40 horse barn (4-stall) from Steel and Stud starts at $13,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $284/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×40 horse barn (4-stall) price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud horse barn (4-stall) ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×40 horse barn (4-stall)?

Almost always for 880+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud horse barn (4-stall) different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×40 horse barn (4-stall) need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×40 horse barn (4-stall) delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×40 horse barn (4-stall) without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $284/month on a 22×40 horse barn (4-stall).

What warranty comes with the 22×40 horse barn (4-stall)?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×40 horse barn (4-stall) in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 22×40 horse barn (4-stall) stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Horse Barn (4-Stall) quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$13,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green prefab metal building horse barn with cupola, open bay, and grazing horse

22×40 Horse Barn (4-Stall)

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green metal building kit detailing shop with black SUV and supply wall inside

22×40 Auto Repair Shop

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

22×40 Auto Repair Shop | Steel and Stud, From $14,850

12

22×40 Auto Repair Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$16,950$14,850SAVE $2,100
or $309/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings22×40Auto Repair Shop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×40 Auto Repair Shop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Independent mechanics order the 22×40 as a single-bay shop with a 12-ft leg height that clears a two-post lift. The 40-ft length fits a lift, a tear-down bay, and a parts-and-tool wall. A 22×40 roll-up door on the gable.

You’re viewing:Auto Repair Shop·Size22×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$14,850$16,950Save $2,100
or as low as $309/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×40
22×36
smaller
$13,550
22×40
this size
$14,850
22×45
longer
$16,450
24×40
wider
$16,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 880 sq ft enclosed
  • 12′ Legs
  • Two-Post Lift Clear
  • 10×10 Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X40-AUTO-REPAIR-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 22×40 auto repair shop.

22 feet wide × 40 feet long. Independent mechanics order the 22×40 as a single-bay shop with a 12-ft leg height that clears a two-post lift.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP22′ × 40′ · 880 sq ft

Auto Repair Shop layout.

Independent mechanics order the 22×40 as a single-bay shop with a 12-ft leg height that clears a two-post lift. The 40-ft length fits a lift, a tear-down bay, and a parts-and-tool wall. A 22×40 roll-up door on the gable plus a walk-in side door is the standard layout.

💡 Pro tip:Auto Repair Shop works well at 22×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×40 Auto Repair Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Auto Repair Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
880 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Auto Repair Shop spec sheet.

Width22′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space880 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Auto Repair Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday auto repair shop
Everyday auto repair shop
880 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a auto repair shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWauto repair shop + seasonal storage
auto repair shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×40 Auto Repair Shop, what makes it different.

880sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$309/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×40 auto repair shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $309/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×40?

880 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 40′ footprint with 880 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,040–$10,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Auto Repair Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 22×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×40 Auto Repair Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×40 Auto Repair Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Auto Repair Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,960+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Auto Repair Shop also viewed:

🏡 22×40

Two-Car Detached Garage

22×40 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🎯 22×40

RV Cover with Workshop Bay

22×40 rv cover with workshop bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Workshop Bay →

🏡 22×40

Hobby Workshop

22×40 hobby workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Workshop →

🌾 22×40

Hay and Equipment Barn

22×40 hay and equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay and Equipment Barn →

🏢 22×40

Contractor Shop

22×40 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 22×40

Man Cave or She Shed

22×40 man cave or she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave or She Shed →

🌾 22×40

Horse Barn (4-Stall)

22×40 horse barn (4-stall) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn (4-Stall) →

🏭 22×40

Storage Building

22×40 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 22×40

Boat and Toy Storage

22×40 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

🏛️ 22×40

Community or Church Building

22×40 community or church building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community or Church Building →

🏡 22×40

Garage with Loft

22×40 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Auto Repair Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 22×40 auto repair shop cost?

A 22×40 auto repair shop from Steel and Stud starts at $14,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $309/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×40 auto repair shop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud auto repair shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×40 auto repair shop?

Almost always for 880+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud auto repair shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×40 auto repair shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×40 auto repair shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×40 auto repair shop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $309/month on a 22×40 auto repair shop.

What warranty comes with the 22×40 auto repair shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×40 auto repair shop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 22×40 auto repair shop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Auto Repair Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$14,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green metal building kit detailing shop with black SUV and supply wall inside

22×40 Auto Repair Shop

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$14,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Open bay metal shed with red end wall and black frame on sunset farmland hills

22×40 Storage Building

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

22×40 Storage Building | Steel and Stud, From $15,250

12

22×40 Storage Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,400$15,250SAVE $2,150
or $318/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings22×40Storage Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×40 Storage Building, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Small businesses and self-storage operators use the 22×40 as a single-tenant unit or a partitioned three-bay storage building. Drop in two interior steel-stud walls and you get three 22×40 bays, each with its own.

You’re viewing:Storage Building·Size22×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$15,250$17,400Save $2,150
or as low as $318/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×40
22×36
smaller
$13,950
22×40
this size
$15,250
22×45
longer
$16,850
24×40
wider
$16,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 880 sq ft enclosed
  • 3 Partition Bays
  • 3 Roll-Up Doors
  • 29 GA Panels
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X40-STORAGE-BUILDINGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 22×40 storage building.

22 feet wide × 40 feet long. Small businesses and self-storage operators use the 22×40 as a single-tenant unit or a partitioned three-bay storage building.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack22′ × 40′ · 880 sq ft shop

Storage Building layout.

Small businesses and self-storage operators use the 22×40 as a single-tenant unit or a partitioned three-bay storage building. Drop in two interior steel-stud walls and you get three 22×40 bays, each with its own roll-up door. The 14-gauge frame and 29-gauge panels keep the kit price under budget.

💡 Pro tip:Storage Building works well at 22×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×40 Storage Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Storage Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
880 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Storage Building spec sheet.

Width22′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space880 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Storage Building.

DAILY USEEveryday storage building
Everyday storage building
880 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a storage building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWstorage building + seasonal storage
storage building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×40 Storage Building, what makes it different.

880sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$318/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×40 storage building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $318/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×40?

880 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 40′ footprint with 880 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,040–$10,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Storage Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 22×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×40 Storage Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×40 Storage Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Storage Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,960+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Storage Building also viewed:

🏡 22×40

Two-Car Detached Garage

22×40 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🎯 22×40

RV Cover with Workshop Bay

22×40 rv cover with workshop bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Workshop Bay →

🏡 22×40

Hobby Workshop

22×40 hobby workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Workshop →

🌾 22×40

Hay and Equipment Barn

22×40 hay and equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay and Equipment Barn →

🏢 22×40

Contractor Shop

22×40 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 22×40

Man Cave or She Shed

22×40 man cave or she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave or She Shed →

🌾 22×40

Horse Barn (4-Stall)

22×40 horse barn (4-stall) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn (4-Stall) →

🏢 22×40

Auto Repair Shop

22×40 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🎯 22×40

Boat and Toy Storage

22×40 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

🏛️ 22×40

Community or Church Building

22×40 community or church building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community or Church Building →

🏡 22×40

Garage with Loft

22×40 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Storage Building questions, answered.

How much does a 22×40 storage building cost?

A 22×40 storage building from Steel and Stud starts at $15,250 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $318/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×40 storage building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud storage building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×40 storage building?

Almost always for 880+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud storage building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×40 storage building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×40 storage building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×40 storage building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $318/month on a 22×40 storage building.

What warranty comes with the 22×40 storage building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×40 storage building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 22×40 storage building handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 22×40 storage building ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Storage Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$15,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Open bay metal shed with red end wall and black frame on sunset farmland hills

22×40 Storage Building

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$15,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal building kit with tall gable, white roll-up door and boat parked on gravel

22×40 Boat and Toy Storage

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

22×40 Boat and Toy Storage | Steel and Stud, From $13,000

12

22×40 Boat and Toy Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$14,800$13,000SAVE $1,800
or $271/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings22×40Boat and Toy Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×40 Boat and Toy Storage, built for hobby and recreational use.

Lake and coastal homeowners store a wake boat on a tandem trailer, two jet skis, and a tow vehicle inside a 22×40. The 40-ft length clears most 24-ft hulls with trailer tongue. Hurricane-rated certification is standard.

You’re viewing:Boat and Toy Storage·Size22×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,000$14,800Save $1,800
or as low as $271/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×40
22×36
smaller
$11,700
22×40
this size
$13,000
22×45
longer
$14,600
24×40
wider
$14,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 880 sq ft enclosed
  • Hurricane Cert
  • 12′ Legs
  • 10×10 Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X40-BOAT-TOY-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 22×40 boat and toy storage.

22 feet wide × 40 feet long. Lake and coastal homeowners store a wake boat on a tandem trailer, two jet skis, and a tow vehicle inside a 22×40.

RV BAYDaily Driver22′ × 40′ · 880 sq ft · tall walls

Boat and Toy Storage layout.

Lake and coastal homeowners store a wake boat on a tandem trailer, two jet skis, and a tow vehicle inside a 22×40. The 40-ft length clears most 24-ft hulls with trailer tongue. Hurricane-rated certification is standard on FL, TX, NC, SC, and LA Gulf Coast orders for insurance compliance.

💡 Pro tip:Boat and Toy Storage works well at 22×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×40 Boat and Toy Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Boat and Toy Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
880 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Boat and Toy Storage spec sheet.

Width22′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space880 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Boat and Toy Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday boat and toy storage
Everyday boat and toy storage
880 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a boat and toy storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWboat and toy storage + seasonal storage
boat and toy storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×40 Boat and Toy Storage, what makes it different.

880sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$271/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×40 boat and toy storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $271/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×40?

880 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 40′ footprint with 880 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,040–$10,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Boat and Toy Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 22×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×40 Boat and Toy Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×40 Boat and Toy Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Boat and Toy Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,960+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Boat and Toy Storage also viewed:

🏡 22×40

Two-Car Detached Garage

22×40 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🎯 22×40

RV Cover with Workshop Bay

22×40 rv cover with workshop bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Workshop Bay →

🏡 22×40

Hobby Workshop

22×40 hobby workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Workshop →

🌾 22×40

Hay and Equipment Barn

22×40 hay and equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay and Equipment Barn →

🏢 22×40

Contractor Shop

22×40 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 22×40

Man Cave or She Shed

22×40 man cave or she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave or She Shed →

🌾 22×40

Horse Barn (4-Stall)

22×40 horse barn (4-stall) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn (4-Stall) →

🏢 22×40

Auto Repair Shop

22×40 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🏭 22×40

Storage Building

22×40 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🏛️ 22×40

Community or Church Building

22×40 community or church building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community or Church Building →

🏡 22×40

Garage with Loft

22×40 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Boat and Toy Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 22×40 boat and toy storage cost?

A 22×40 boat and toy storage from Steel and Stud starts at $13,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $271/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×40 boat and toy storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud boat and toy storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×40 boat and toy storage?

Almost always for 880+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud boat and toy storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×40 boat and toy storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×40 boat and toy storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×40 boat and toy storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $271/month on a 22×40 boat and toy storage.

What warranty comes with the 22×40 boat and toy storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×40 boat and toy storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 22×40 boat and toy storage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a boat and toy storage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Boat and Toy Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$13,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal building kit with tall gable, white roll-up door and boat parked on gravel

22×40 Boat and Toy Storage

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal building kit community hall with covered porch as guests arrive at golden hour

22×40 Community or Church Building

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

22×40 Community or Church Building | Steel and Stud, From $14,950

12

22×40 Community or Church Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,050$14,950SAVE $2,100
or $311/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings22×40Community or Church Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×40 Community or Church Building, engineered to code for assembly use.

Small congregations and rural community groups use the 22×40 as a fellowship hall, classroom annex, or food-pantry warehouse. Stamped engineered drawings and IBC-certified construction make the permit process.

You’re viewing:Community or Church Building·Size22×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$14,950$17,050Save $2,100
or as low as $311/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×40
22×36
smaller
$13,650
22×40
this size
$14,950
22×45
longer
$16,550
24×40
wider
$16,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 880 sq ft enclosed
  • IBC Certified
  • Stamped Drawings
  • HVAC Openings
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X40-COMMUNITY-CHURCHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 22×40 community or church building.

22 feet wide × 40 feet long. Small congregations and rural community groups use the 22×40 as a fellowship hall, classroom annex, or food-pantry warehouse.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE22′ × 40′ · 880 sq ft

Community or Church Building layout.

Small congregations and rural community groups use the 22×40 as a fellowship hall, classroom annex, or food-pantry warehouse. Stamped engineered drawings and IBC-certified construction make the permit process straightforward in most county permit offices. Add HVAC-ready framed openings and full R-19 insulation.

💡 Pro tip:Community or Church Building works well at 22×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×40 Community or Church Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Community or Church Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
880 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Community or Church Building spec sheet.

Width22′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space880 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Community or Church Building.

DAILY USEEveryday community or church building
Everyday community or church building
880 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a community or church building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommunity or church building + seasonal storage
community or church building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×40 Community or Church Building, what makes it different.

880sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$311/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×40 community or church building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $311/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×40?

880 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 40′ footprint with 880 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,040–$10,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Community or Church Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 22×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×40 Community or Church Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×40 Community or Church Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Community or Church Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,960+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Community or Church Building also viewed:

🏡 22×40

Two-Car Detached Garage

22×40 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🎯 22×40

RV Cover with Workshop Bay

22×40 rv cover with workshop bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Workshop Bay →

🏡 22×40

Hobby Workshop

22×40 hobby workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Workshop →

🌾 22×40

Hay and Equipment Barn

22×40 hay and equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay and Equipment Barn →

🏢 22×40

Contractor Shop

22×40 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 22×40

Man Cave or She Shed

22×40 man cave or she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave or She Shed →

🌾 22×40

Horse Barn (4-Stall)

22×40 horse barn (4-stall) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn (4-Stall) →

🏢 22×40

Auto Repair Shop

22×40 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🏭 22×40

Storage Building

22×40 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 22×40

Boat and Toy Storage

22×40 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

🏡 22×40

Garage with Loft

22×40 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Community or Church Building questions, answered.

How much does a 22×40 community or church building cost?

A 22×40 community or church building from Steel and Stud starts at $14,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $311/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×40 community or church building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud community or church building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×40 community or church building?

Almost always for 880+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud community or church building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×40 community or church building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×40 community or church building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×40 community or church building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $311/month on a 22×40 community or church building.

What warranty comes with the 22×40 community or church building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×40 community or church building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 22×40 community or church building pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Community or Church Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$14,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal building kit community hall with covered porch as guests arrive at golden hour

22×40 Community or Church Building

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$14,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Red steel garage with triple bay black doors and family vehicles parked outside

22×40 Garage with Loft

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

22×40 Garage with Loft | Steel and Stud, From $13,000

12

22×40 Garage with Loft
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$14,800$13,000SAVE $1,800
or $271/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings22×40Garage with Loft

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×40 Garage with Loft, built for daily backyard use.

Buyers who need extra storage without a bigger footprint order the 22×40 with a 14-ft leg height and an engineered mezzanine over the back 12 feet. That adds roughly 264 sq ft of upper-level storage above the parking.

You’re viewing:Garage with Loft·Size22×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,000$14,800Save $1,800
or as low as $271/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×40
22×36
smaller
$11,700
22×40
this size
$13,000
22×45
longer
$14,600
24×40
wider
$14,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 880 sq ft enclosed
  • 14′ Legs
  • Engineered Mezzanine
  • +264 sq ft Loft
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X40-GARAGE-LOFTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 22×40 garage with loft.

22 feet wide × 40 feet long. Buyers who need extra storage without a bigger footprint order the 22×40 with a 14-ft leg height and an engineered mezzanine over the back 12 feet.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area22′ × 40′ · 880 sq ft

Garage with Loft layout.

Buyers who need extra storage without a bigger footprint order the 22×40 with a 14-ft leg height and an engineered mezzanine over the back 12 feet. That adds roughly 264 sq ft of upper-level storage above the parking bays. Pair with a pull-down attic ladder or a fixed staircase on the side wall.

💡 Pro tip:Garage with Loft works well at 22×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×40 Garage with Loft in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Garage with Loft.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
880 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Garage with Loft spec sheet.

Width22′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space880 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Garage with Loft.

DAILY USEEveryday garage with loft
Everyday garage with loft
880 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a garage with loft.
STORAGE OVERFLOWgarage with loft + seasonal storage
garage with loft + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×40 Garage with Loft, what makes it different.

880sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$271/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×40 garage with loft is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $271/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×40?

880 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 40′ footprint with 880 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $7,040–$10,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Garage with Loft shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 22×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×40 Garage with Loft buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×40 Garage with Loft

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Garage with Loft · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,960+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Garage with Loft also viewed:

🏡 22×40

Two-Car Detached Garage

22×40 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🎯 22×40

RV Cover with Workshop Bay

22×40 rv cover with workshop bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Workshop Bay →

🏡 22×40

Hobby Workshop

22×40 hobby workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Workshop →

🌾 22×40

Hay and Equipment Barn

22×40 hay and equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay and Equipment Barn →

🏢 22×40

Contractor Shop

22×40 contractor shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Shop →

🏡 22×40

Man Cave or She Shed

22×40 man cave or she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave or She Shed →

🌾 22×40

Horse Barn (4-Stall)

22×40 horse barn (4-stall) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn (4-Stall) →

🏢 22×40

Auto Repair Shop

22×40 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🏭 22×40

Storage Building

22×40 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 22×40

Boat and Toy Storage

22×40 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

🏛️ 22×40

Community or Church Building

22×40 community or church building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community or Church Building →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Garage with Loft questions, answered.

How much does a 22×40 garage with loft cost?

A 22×40 garage with loft from Steel and Stud starts at $13,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $271/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×40 garage with loft price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud garage with loft ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×40 garage with loft?

Almost always for 880+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud garage with loft different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×40 garage with loft need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×40 garage with loft delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×40 garage with loft without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $271/month on a 22×40 garage with loft.

What warranty comes with the 22×40 garage with loft?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×40 garage with loft in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 22×40 garage with loft add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 22×40 garage with loft typically adds $7,040–$10,560 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Garage with Loft quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$13,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red steel garage with triple bay black doors and family vehicles parked outside

22×40 Garage with Loft

880 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

22′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×40 steel building delivers 880 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Wood-look metal building office studio with corner porch and large glass windows in a backyard

10×10 Backyard Home Office

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×10 Backyard Home Office | Steel and Stud, From $1,500

12

10×10 Backyard Home Office
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$1,700$1,500SAVE $200
or $31/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×10Backyard Home Office

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×10 Backyard Home Office, built for daily backyard use.

Remote workers convert this into a 100 sq ft home office with R-19 batt insulation, a mini-split, a desk wall, and a window seat. The 10×10 prefab building skips county permits in most jurisdictions when there’s no.

You’re viewing:Backyard Home Office·Size10×10·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$1,500$1,700Save $200
or as low as $31/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×10
10×10
this size
$1,500
10×12
longer
$1,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 100 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Vertical Roof
  • Window Wall
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X10-BACKYARD-HOME-OFBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 10×10 backyard home office.

10 feet wide × 10 feet long. Remote workers convert this into a 100 sq ft home office with R-19 batt insulation, a mini-split, a desk wall, and a window seat.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE10′ × 10′ · 100 sq ft

Backyard Home Office layout.

Remote workers convert this into a 100 sq ft home office with R-19 batt insulation, a mini-split, a desk wall, and a window seat. The 10×10 prefab building skips county permits in most jurisdictions when there’s no plumbing, an easy backyard add.

💡 Pro tip:Backyard Home Office works well at 10×10, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×10 Backyard Home Office in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Backyard Home Office.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×10 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Backyard Home Office spec sheet.

Width10′
Length10′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Backyard Home Office.

DAILY USEEveryday backyard home office
Everyday backyard home office
100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a backyard home office.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbackyard home office + seasonal storage
backyard home office + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×10 Backyard Home Office, what makes it different.

100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$31/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×10 backyard home office is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $31/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×10?

100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 10′ footprint with 100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $800–$1,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Backyard Home Office shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×10 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×10 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×10 Backyard Home Office buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×10 Backyard Home Office

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Backyard Home Office · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×11×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$450+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Backyard Home Office also viewed:

🏡 10×10

Backyard Storage Shed

10×10 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 10×10

Garden Building with Window

10×10 garden building with window configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Building with Window →

🎯 10×10

Carport for Single Vehicle

10×10 carport for single vehicle configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Single Vehicle →

🏡 10×10

Tool Shed for Hobbyists

10×10 tool shed for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Hobbyists →

🎯 10×10

Motorcycle & ATV Garage

10×10 motorcycle & atv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Garage →

🏡 10×10

Pool Equipment House

10×10 pool equipment house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment House →

🎯 10×10

She-Shed / Hobby Room

10×10 she-shed / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Hobby Room →

🌾 10×10

Chicken Coop Shelter

10×10 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🏡 10×10

Lawn Equipment Storage

10×10 lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Storage →

🏢 10×10

Job-Site Tool Storage

10×10 job-site tool storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Job-Site Tool Storage →

🌾 10×10

Feed & Hay Storage

10×10 feed & hay storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Hay Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Backyard Home Office questions, answered.

How much does a 10×10 backyard home office cost?

A 10×10 backyard home office from Steel and Stud starts at $1,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $31/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×10 backyard home office price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud backyard home office ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×10 backyard home office?

Almost always for 100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud backyard home office different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×10 backyard home office need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×10 backyard home office delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×10 backyard home office without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $31/month on a 10×10 backyard home office.

What warranty comes with the 10×10 backyard home office?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×10 backyard home office in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 10×10 backyard home office add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 10×10 backyard home office typically adds $800–$1,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Backyard Home Office quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$1,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Wood-look metal building office studio with corner porch and large glass windows in a backyard

10×10 Backyard Home Office

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$1,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green metal building kit with cream roll-up door and window in a landscaped garden

10×10 Garden Building with Window

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×10 Garden Building with Window | Steel and Stud, From $1,500

12

10×10 Garden Building with Window
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$1,700$1,500SAVE $200
or $31/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×10Garden Building with Window

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×10 Garden Building with Window, built for daily backyard use.

Gardeners want light and airflow. This 10×10 metal building with windows runs a single-hung 10×10 on the side wall plus a walk-in door, leaving the back and end walls free for potting benches and pegboard. Add a.

You’re viewing:Garden Building with Window·Size10×10·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$1,500$1,700Save $200
or as low as $31/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×10
10×10
this size
$1,500
10×12
longer
$1,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 100 sq ft enclosed
  • 30×30 Window
  • Skylight Ready
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X10-GARDEN-BUILDING-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 10×10 garden building with window.

10 feet wide × 10 feet long. Gardeners want light and airflow.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack10′ × 10′ · 100 sq ft shop

Garden Building with Window layout.

Gardeners want light and airflow. This 10×10 metal building with windows runs a single-hung 10×10 on the side wall plus a walk-in door, leaving the back and end walls free for potting benches and pegboard. Add a skylight for seed-starting in spring.

💡 Pro tip:Garden Building with Window works well at 10×10, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×10 Garden Building with Window in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Garden Building with Window.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×10 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Garden Building with Window spec sheet.

Width10′
Length10′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Garden Building with Window.

DAILY USEEveryday garden building with window
Everyday garden building with window
100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a garden building with window.
STORAGE OVERFLOWgarden building with window + seasonal storage
garden building with window + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×10 Garden Building with Window, what makes it different.

100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$31/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×10 garden building with window is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $31/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×10?

100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 10′ footprint with 100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $800–$1,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Garden Building with Window shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×10 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×10 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×10 Garden Building with Window buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×10 Garden Building with Window

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Garden Building with Window · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×11×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$450+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Garden Building with Window also viewed:

🏡 10×10

Backyard Storage Shed

10×10 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🎯 10×10

Carport for Single Vehicle

10×10 carport for single vehicle configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Single Vehicle →

🏡 10×10

Tool Shed for Hobbyists

10×10 tool shed for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Hobbyists →

🎯 10×10

Motorcycle & ATV Garage

10×10 motorcycle & atv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Garage →

🏡 10×10

Pool Equipment House

10×10 pool equipment house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment House →

🏡 10×10

Backyard Home Office

10×10 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 10×10

She-Shed / Hobby Room

10×10 she-shed / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Hobby Room →

🌾 10×10

Chicken Coop Shelter

10×10 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🏡 10×10

Lawn Equipment Storage

10×10 lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Storage →

🏢 10×10

Job-Site Tool Storage

10×10 job-site tool storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Job-Site Tool Storage →

🌾 10×10

Feed & Hay Storage

10×10 feed & hay storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Hay Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Garden Building with Window questions, answered.

How much does a 10×10 garden building with window cost?

A 10×10 garden building with window from Steel and Stud starts at $1,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $31/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×10 garden building with window price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud garden building with window ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×10 garden building with window?

Almost always for 100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud garden building with window different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×10 garden building with window need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×10 garden building with window delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×10 garden building with window without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $31/month on a 10×10 garden building with window.

What warranty comes with the 10×10 garden building with window?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×10 garden building with window in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 10×10 garden building with window add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 10×10 garden building with window typically adds $800–$1,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Garden Building with Window quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$1,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green metal building kit with cream roll-up door and window in a landscaped garden

10×10 Garden Building with Window

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$1,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Cream steel carport with black gable roof and open drive-through bays at sunset

10×10 Carport for Single Vehicle

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×10 Carport for Single Vehicle | Steel and Stud, From $1,500

12

10×10 Carport for Single Vehicle
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$1,700$1,500SAVE $200
or $31/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×10Carport for Single Vehicle

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×10 Carport for Single Vehicle, built for hobby and recreational use.

A 10×10 carport metal cover handles one compact car, a UTV, or a motorcycle pair under roof. Open-sided framing keeps cost in the $1,500-$1,700 range and skips most permit thresholds. Add one or two side walls later if.

You’re viewing:Carport for Single Vehicle·Size10×10·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$1,500$1,700Save $200
or as low as $31/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×10
10×10
this size
$1,500
10×12
longer
$1,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 100 sq ft enclosed
  • Open Sides
  • Boxed Eave
  • Concrete Anchors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X10-CARPORT-SINGLE-VBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 10×10 carport for single vehicle.

10 feet wide × 10 feet long. A 10×10 carport metal cover handles one compact car, a UTV, or a motorcycle pair under roof.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area10′ × 10′ · 100 sq ft

Carport for Single Vehicle layout.

A 10×10 carport metal cover handles one compact car, a UTV, or a motorcycle pair under roof. Open-sided framing keeps cost in the $1,500-$1,700 range and skips most permit thresholds. Add one or two side walls later if you decide you want wind protection.

💡 Pro tip:Carport for Single Vehicle works well at 10×10, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×10 Carport for Single Vehicle in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Carport for Single Vehicle.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×10 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Carport for Single Vehicle spec sheet.

Width10′
Length10′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Carport for Single Vehicle.

DAILY USEEveryday carport for single vehicle
Everyday carport for single vehicle
100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a carport for single vehicle.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcarport for single vehicle + seasonal storage
carport for single vehicle + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×10 Carport for Single Vehicle, what makes it different.

100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$31/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×10 carport for single vehicle is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $31/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×10?

100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 10′ footprint with 100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $800–$1,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Carport for Single Vehicle shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×10 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×10 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×10 Carport for Single Vehicle buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×10 Carport for Single Vehicle

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Carport for Single Vehicle · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×11×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$450+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Carport for Single Vehicle also viewed:

🏡 10×10

Backyard Storage Shed

10×10 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 10×10

Garden Building with Window

10×10 garden building with window configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Building with Window →

🏡 10×10

Tool Shed for Hobbyists

10×10 tool shed for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Hobbyists →

🎯 10×10

Motorcycle & ATV Garage

10×10 motorcycle & atv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Garage →

🏡 10×10

Pool Equipment House

10×10 pool equipment house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment House →

🏡 10×10

Backyard Home Office

10×10 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 10×10

She-Shed / Hobby Room

10×10 she-shed / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Hobby Room →

🌾 10×10

Chicken Coop Shelter

10×10 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🏡 10×10

Lawn Equipment Storage

10×10 lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Storage →

🏢 10×10

Job-Site Tool Storage

10×10 job-site tool storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Job-Site Tool Storage →

🌾 10×10

Feed & Hay Storage

10×10 feed & hay storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Hay Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Carport for Single Vehicle questions, answered.

How much does a 10×10 carport for single vehicle cost?

A 10×10 carport for single vehicle from Steel and Stud starts at $1,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $31/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×10 carport for single vehicle price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud carport for single vehicle ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×10 carport for single vehicle?

Almost always for 100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud carport for single vehicle different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×10 carport for single vehicle need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×10 carport for single vehicle delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×10 carport for single vehicle without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $31/month on a 10×10 carport for single vehicle.

What warranty comes with the 10×10 carport for single vehicle?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×10 carport for single vehicle in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 10×10 carport for single vehicle for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a carport for single vehicle to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Carport for Single Vehicle quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$1,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Cream steel carport with black gable roof and open drive-through bays at sunset

10×10 Carport for Single Vehicle

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$1,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Modern sage green steel building garage apartment with shed roof and black glass garage door

10×10 Tool Shed for Hobbyists

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×10 Tool Shed for Hobbyists | Steel and Stud, From $1,500

12

10×10 Tool Shed for Hobbyists
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$1,700$1,500SAVE $200
or $31/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×10Tool Shed for Hobbyists

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×10 Tool Shed for Hobbyists, built for daily backyard use.

Hobbyists building out a tool shed get a full wall of pegboard, a 6-foot workbench, and a rolling tool chest in 100 sq ft. The 10×10 steel shed framing accepts French cleats anywhere along the studs, which a stamped tin.

You’re viewing:Tool Shed for Hobbyists·Size10×10·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$1,500$1,700Save $200
or as low as $31/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×10
10×10
this size
$1,500
10×12
longer
$1,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 100 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Upgrade
  • Insulation Ready
  • Roll-Up Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X10-TOOL-SHED-HOBBYIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 10×10 tool shed for hobbyists.

10 feet wide × 10 feet long. Hobbyists building out a tool shed get a full wall of pegboard, a 6-foot workbench, and a rolling tool chest in 100 sq ft.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP10′ × 10′ · 100 sq ft

Tool Shed for Hobbyists layout.

Hobbyists building out a tool shed get a full wall of pegboard, a 6-foot workbench, and a rolling tool chest in 100 sq ft. The 10×10 steel shed framing accepts French cleats anywhere along the studs, which a stamped tin big-box shed won’t.

💡 Pro tip:Tool Shed for Hobbyists works well at 10×10, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×10 Tool Shed for Hobbyists in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tool Shed for Hobbyists.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×10 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tool Shed for Hobbyists spec sheet.

Width10′
Length10′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tool Shed for Hobbyists.

DAILY USEEveryday tool shed for hobbyists
Everyday tool shed for hobbyists
100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tool shed for hobbyists.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtool shed for hobbyists + seasonal storage
tool shed for hobbyists + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×10 Tool Shed for Hobbyists, what makes it different.

100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$31/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×10 tool shed for hobbyists is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $31/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×10?

100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 10′ footprint with 100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $800–$1,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tool Shed for Hobbyists shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×10 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×10 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×10 Tool Shed for Hobbyists buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×10 Tool Shed for Hobbyists

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Tool Shed for Hobbyists · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×11×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$450+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tool Shed for Hobbyists also viewed:

🏡 10×10

Backyard Storage Shed

10×10 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 10×10

Garden Building with Window

10×10 garden building with window configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Building with Window →

🎯 10×10

Carport for Single Vehicle

10×10 carport for single vehicle configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Single Vehicle →

🎯 10×10

Motorcycle & ATV Garage

10×10 motorcycle & atv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Garage →

🏡 10×10

Pool Equipment House

10×10 pool equipment house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment House →

🏡 10×10

Backyard Home Office

10×10 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 10×10

She-Shed / Hobby Room

10×10 she-shed / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Hobby Room →

🌾 10×10

Chicken Coop Shelter

10×10 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🏡 10×10

Lawn Equipment Storage

10×10 lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Storage →

🏢 10×10

Job-Site Tool Storage

10×10 job-site tool storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Job-Site Tool Storage →

🌾 10×10

Feed & Hay Storage

10×10 feed & hay storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Hay Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tool Shed for Hobbyists questions, answered.

How much does a 10×10 tool shed for hobbyists cost?

A 10×10 tool shed for hobbyists from Steel and Stud starts at $1,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $31/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×10 tool shed for hobbyists price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud tool shed for hobbyists ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×10 tool shed for hobbyists?

Almost always for 100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tool shed for hobbyists different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×10 tool shed for hobbyists need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×10 tool shed for hobbyists delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×10 tool shed for hobbyists without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $31/month on a 10×10 tool shed for hobbyists.

What warranty comes with the 10×10 tool shed for hobbyists?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×10 tool shed for hobbyists in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 10×10 tool shed for hobbyists add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 10×10 tool shed for hobbyists typically adds $800–$1,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Tool Shed for Hobbyists quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$1,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Modern sage green steel building garage apartment with shed roof and black glass garage door

10×10 Tool Shed for Hobbyists

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$1,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal building toy garage at sunset with yellow motorcycle and canoe inside the open bay

10×10 Motorcycle & ATV Garage

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×10 Motorcycle & ATV Garage | Steel and Stud, From $1,500

12

10×10 Motorcycle & ATV Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$1,700$1,500SAVE $200
or $31/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×10Motorcycle & ATV Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×10 Motorcycle & ATV Garage, built for hobby and recreational use.

Two motorcycles park nose-to-tail with a tool cart between them, or one ATV plus a riding mower fits if you stagger the angle. Roll-up door at 8’x7′ clears handlebars; a walk-in side door means you don’t have to open.

You’re viewing:Motorcycle & ATV Garage·Size10×10·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$1,500$1,700Save $200
or as low as $31/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×10
10×10
this size
$1,500
10×12
longer
$1,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 100 sq ft enclosed
  • 8×7 Roll-Up
  • 9′ Sidewall
  • Lockable
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X10-MOTORCYCLE-ATV-GBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 10×10 motorcycle & atv garage.

10 feet wide × 10 feet long. Two motorcycles park nose-to-tail with a tool cart between them, or one ATV plus a riding mower fits if you stagger the angle.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area10′ × 10′ · 100 sq ft

Motorcycle & ATV Garage layout.

Two motorcycles park nose-to-tail with a tool cart between them, or one ATV plus a riding mower fits if you stagger the angle. Roll-up door at 8’x7′ clears handlebars; a walk-in side door means you don’t have to open the big door for a quick grab.

💡 Pro tip:Motorcycle & ATV Garage works well at 10×10, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×10 Motorcycle & ATV Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Motorcycle & ATV Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×10 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Motorcycle & ATV Garage spec sheet.

Width10′
Length10′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Motorcycle & ATV Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday motorcycle & atv garage
Everyday motorcycle & atv garage
100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a motorcycle & atv garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmotorcycle & atv garage + seasonal storage
motorcycle & atv garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×10 Motorcycle & ATV Garage, what makes it different.

100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$31/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×10 motorcycle & atv garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $31/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×10?

100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 10′ footprint with 100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $800–$1,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Motorcycle & ATV Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×10 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×10 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×10 Motorcycle & ATV Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×10 Motorcycle & ATV Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Motorcycle & ATV Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×11×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$450+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Motorcycle & ATV Garage also viewed:

🏡 10×10

Backyard Storage Shed

10×10 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 10×10

Garden Building with Window

10×10 garden building with window configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Building with Window →

🎯 10×10

Carport for Single Vehicle

10×10 carport for single vehicle configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Single Vehicle →

🏡 10×10

Tool Shed for Hobbyists

10×10 tool shed for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Hobbyists →

🏡 10×10

Pool Equipment House

10×10 pool equipment house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment House →

🏡 10×10

Backyard Home Office

10×10 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 10×10

She-Shed / Hobby Room

10×10 she-shed / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Hobby Room →

🌾 10×10

Chicken Coop Shelter

10×10 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🏡 10×10

Lawn Equipment Storage

10×10 lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Storage →

🏢 10×10

Job-Site Tool Storage

10×10 job-site tool storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Job-Site Tool Storage →

🌾 10×10

Feed & Hay Storage

10×10 feed & hay storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Hay Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Motorcycle & ATV Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 10×10 motorcycle & atv garage cost?

A 10×10 motorcycle & atv garage from Steel and Stud starts at $1,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $31/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×10 motorcycle & atv garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud motorcycle & atv garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×10 motorcycle & atv garage?

Almost always for 100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud motorcycle & atv garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×10 motorcycle & atv garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×10 motorcycle & atv garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×10 motorcycle & atv garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $31/month on a 10×10 motorcycle & atv garage.

What warranty comes with the 10×10 motorcycle & atv garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×10 motorcycle & atv garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 10×10 motorcycle & atv garage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a motorcycle & atv garage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Motorcycle & ATV Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$1,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal building toy garage at sunset with yellow motorcycle and canoe inside the open bay

10×10 Motorcycle & ATV Garage

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$1,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Navy steel building pool house with white trim and sliding glass doors beside an inground pool

10×10 Pool Equipment House

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×10 Pool Equipment House | Steel and Stud, From $1,500

12

10×10 Pool Equipment House
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$1,700$1,500SAVE $200
or $31/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×10Pool Equipment House

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×10 Pool Equipment House, built for daily backyard use.

Small property owners with above-ground pools use this for the pump, filter, chemicals, and floats. Vented gable ends keep chlorine fumes from condensing on steel. Locked roll-up door keeps kids out of the chemical.

You’re viewing:Pool Equipment House·Size10×10·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$1,500$1,700Save $200
or as low as $31/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×10
10×10
this size
$1,500
10×12
longer
$1,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 100 sq ft enclosed
  • Vented Gables
  • Lockable
  • Galvalume Option
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X10-POOL-EQUIPMENT-HBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 10×10 pool equipment house.

10 feet wide × 10 feet long. Small property owners with above-ground pools use this for the pump, filter, chemicals, and floats.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area10′ × 10′ · 100 sq ft

Pool Equipment House layout.

Small property owners with above-ground pools use this for the pump, filter, chemicals, and floats. Vented gable ends keep chlorine fumes from condensing on steel. Locked roll-up door keeps kids out of the chemical shelf.

💡 Pro tip:Pool Equipment House works well at 10×10, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×10 Pool Equipment House in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Pool Equipment House.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×10 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Pool Equipment House spec sheet.

Width10′
Length10′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Pool Equipment House.

DAILY USEEveryday pool equipment house
Everyday pool equipment house
100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a pool equipment house.
STORAGE OVERFLOWpool equipment house + seasonal storage
pool equipment house + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×10 Pool Equipment House, what makes it different.

100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$31/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×10 pool equipment house is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $31/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×10?

100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 10′ footprint with 100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $800–$1,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Pool Equipment House shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×10 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×10 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×10 Pool Equipment House buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×10 Pool Equipment House

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Pool Equipment House · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×11×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$450+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Pool Equipment House also viewed:

🏡 10×10

Backyard Storage Shed

10×10 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 10×10

Garden Building with Window

10×10 garden building with window configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Building with Window →

🎯 10×10

Carport for Single Vehicle

10×10 carport for single vehicle configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Single Vehicle →

🏡 10×10

Tool Shed for Hobbyists

10×10 tool shed for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Hobbyists →

🎯 10×10

Motorcycle & ATV Garage

10×10 motorcycle & atv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Garage →

🏡 10×10

Backyard Home Office

10×10 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 10×10

She-Shed / Hobby Room

10×10 she-shed / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Hobby Room →

🌾 10×10

Chicken Coop Shelter

10×10 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🏡 10×10

Lawn Equipment Storage

10×10 lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Storage →

🏢 10×10

Job-Site Tool Storage

10×10 job-site tool storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Job-Site Tool Storage →

🌾 10×10

Feed & Hay Storage

10×10 feed & hay storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Hay Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Pool Equipment House questions, answered.

How much does a 10×10 pool equipment house cost?

A 10×10 pool equipment house from Steel and Stud starts at $1,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $31/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×10 pool equipment house price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud pool equipment house ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×10 pool equipment house?

Almost always for 100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud pool equipment house different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×10 pool equipment house need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×10 pool equipment house delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×10 pool equipment house without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $31/month on a 10×10 pool equipment house.

What warranty comes with the 10×10 pool equipment house?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×10 pool equipment house in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 10×10 pool equipment house add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 10×10 pool equipment house typically adds $800–$1,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Pool Equipment House quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$1,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Navy steel building pool house with white trim and sliding glass doors beside an inground pool

10×10 Pool Equipment House

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$1,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Cream metal building kit with green trim, single slope roof and SUV in lit studio bay

10×10 She-Shed / Hobby Room

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×10 She-Shed / Hobby Room | Steel and Stud, From $1,500

12

10×10 She-Shed / Hobby Room
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$1,700$1,500SAVE $200
or $31/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×10She-Shed / Hobby Room

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×10 She-Shed / Hobby Room, built for hobby and recreational use.

Hobbyists doing pottery, sewing, or scrapbooking get a dedicated 10×10 building with a craft table, supply shelving, and natural light from two windows. Wainscoting in a contrasting color and a Barn Red roof reads more.

You’re viewing:She-Shed / Hobby Room·Size10×10·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$1,500$1,700Save $200
or as low as $31/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×10
10×10
this size
$1,500
10×12
longer
$1,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 100 sq ft enclosed
  • Wainscoting
  • Two Windows
  • Painted Trim
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X10-SHE-SHED-HOBBY-RBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 10×10 she-shed / hobby room.

10 feet wide × 10 feet long. Hobbyists doing pottery, sewing, or scrapbooking get a dedicated 10×10 building with a craft table, supply shelving, and natural light from two windows.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑10′ × 10′ · 100 ground + loft

She-Shed / Hobby Room layout.

Hobbyists doing pottery, sewing, or scrapbooking get a dedicated 10×10 building with a craft table, supply shelving, and natural light from two windows. Wainscoting in a contrasting color and a Barn Red roof reads more cottage than utility.

💡 Pro tip:She-Shed / Hobby Room works well at 10×10, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×10 She-Shed / Hobby Room in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your She-Shed / Hobby Room.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×10 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

She-Shed / Hobby Room spec sheet.

Width10′
Length10′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use She-Shed / Hobby Room.

DAILY USEEveryday she-shed / hobby room
Everyday she-shed / hobby room
100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a she-shed / hobby room.
STORAGE OVERFLOWshe-shed / hobby room + seasonal storage
she-shed / hobby room + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×10 She-Shed / Hobby Room, what makes it different.

100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$31/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×10 she-shed / hobby room is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $31/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×10?

100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 10′ footprint with 100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $800–$1,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from She-Shed / Hobby Room shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×10 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×10 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×10 She-Shed / Hobby Room buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×10 She-Shed / Hobby Room

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your She-Shed / Hobby Room · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×11×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$450+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose She-Shed / Hobby Room also viewed:

🏡 10×10

Backyard Storage Shed

10×10 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 10×10

Garden Building with Window

10×10 garden building with window configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Building with Window →

🎯 10×10

Carport for Single Vehicle

10×10 carport for single vehicle configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Single Vehicle →

🏡 10×10

Tool Shed for Hobbyists

10×10 tool shed for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Hobbyists →

🎯 10×10

Motorcycle & ATV Garage

10×10 motorcycle & atv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Garage →

🏡 10×10

Pool Equipment House

10×10 pool equipment house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment House →

🏡 10×10

Backyard Home Office

10×10 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🌾 10×10

Chicken Coop Shelter

10×10 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🏡 10×10

Lawn Equipment Storage

10×10 lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Storage →

🏢 10×10

Job-Site Tool Storage

10×10 job-site tool storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Job-Site Tool Storage →

🌾 10×10

Feed & Hay Storage

10×10 feed & hay storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Hay Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

She-Shed / Hobby Room questions, answered.

How much does a 10×10 she-shed / hobby room cost?

A 10×10 she-shed / hobby room from Steel and Stud starts at $1,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $31/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×10 she-shed / hobby room price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud she-shed / hobby room ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×10 she-shed / hobby room?

Almost always for 100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud she-shed / hobby room different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×10 she-shed / hobby room need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×10 she-shed / hobby room delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×10 she-shed / hobby room without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $31/month on a 10×10 she-shed / hobby room.

What warranty comes with the 10×10 she-shed / hobby room?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×10 she-shed / hobby room in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 10×10 she-shed / hobby room for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a she-shed / hobby room to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your She-Shed / Hobby Room quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$1,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Cream metal building kit with green trim, single slope roof and SUV in lit studio bay

10×10 She-Shed / Hobby Room

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$1,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green single-slope steel structure built as an open-sided loafing shelter with cream posts

10×10 Chicken Coop Shelter

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×10 Chicken Coop Shelter | Steel and Stud, From $2,150

12

10×10 Chicken Coop Shelter
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$2,450$2,150SAVE $300
or $45/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×10Chicken Coop Shelter

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×10 Chicken Coop Shelter, built for farm and ranch demands.

Backyard chicken keepers run a 10×10 coop for 8-12 hens with roosting bars on the back wall, nesting boxes, and a 36" walk-in door for cleaning. Steel won’t rot from droppings and water like a wood coop will after two.

You’re viewing:Chicken Coop Shelter·Size10×10·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$2,150$2,450Save $300
or as low as $45/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×10
10×10
this size
$2,150
10×12
longer
$2,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 100 sq ft enclosed
  • Walk-In Door
  • Vented Eaves
  • Mobile-Home Anchors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X10-CHICKEN-COOP-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 10×10 chicken coop shelter.

10 feet wide × 10 feet long. Backyard chicken keepers run a 10×10 coop for 8-12 hens with roosting bars on the back wall, nesting boxes, and a 36" walk-in door for cleaning.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP10′ × 10′ · 100 sq ft

Chicken Coop Shelter layout.

Backyard chicken keepers run a 10×10 coop for 8-12 hens with roosting bars on the back wall, nesting boxes, and a 36" walk-in door for cleaning. Steel won’t rot from droppings and water like a wood coop will after two seasons.

💡 Pro tip:Chicken Coop Shelter works well at 10×10, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×10 Chicken Coop Shelter in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Chicken Coop Shelter.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×10 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Chicken Coop Shelter spec sheet.

Width10′
Length10′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Chicken Coop Shelter.

DAILY USEEveryday chicken coop shelter
Everyday chicken coop shelter
100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a chicken coop shelter.
STORAGE OVERFLOWchicken coop shelter + seasonal storage
chicken coop shelter + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×10 Chicken Coop Shelter, what makes it different.

100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$45/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×10 chicken coop shelter is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $45/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×10?

100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 10′ footprint with 100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $800–$1,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Chicken Coop Shelter shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×10 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×10 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×10 Chicken Coop Shelter buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×10 Chicken Coop Shelter

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Chicken Coop Shelter · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×11×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$450+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Chicken Coop Shelter also viewed:

🏡 10×10

Backyard Storage Shed

10×10 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 10×10

Garden Building with Window

10×10 garden building with window configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Building with Window →

🎯 10×10

Carport for Single Vehicle

10×10 carport for single vehicle configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Single Vehicle →

🏡 10×10

Tool Shed for Hobbyists

10×10 tool shed for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Hobbyists →

🎯 10×10

Motorcycle & ATV Garage

10×10 motorcycle & atv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Garage →

🏡 10×10

Pool Equipment House

10×10 pool equipment house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment House →

🏡 10×10

Backyard Home Office

10×10 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 10×10

She-Shed / Hobby Room

10×10 she-shed / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Hobby Room →

🏡 10×10

Lawn Equipment Storage

10×10 lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Storage →

🏢 10×10

Job-Site Tool Storage

10×10 job-site tool storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Job-Site Tool Storage →

🌾 10×10

Feed & Hay Storage

10×10 feed & hay storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Hay Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Chicken Coop Shelter questions, answered.

How much does a 10×10 chicken coop shelter cost?

A 10×10 chicken coop shelter from Steel and Stud starts at $2,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $45/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×10 chicken coop shelter price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud chicken coop shelter ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×10 chicken coop shelter?

Almost always for 100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud chicken coop shelter different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×10 chicken coop shelter need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×10 chicken coop shelter delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×10 chicken coop shelter without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $45/month on a 10×10 chicken coop shelter.

What warranty comes with the 10×10 chicken coop shelter?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×10 chicken coop shelter in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 10×10 chicken coop shelter stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Chicken Coop Shelter quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green single-slope steel structure built as an open-sided loafing shelter with cream posts

10×10 Chicken Coop Shelter

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White steel garage at dusk with black roll-up door as a rider walks his Harley

10×10 Lawn Equipment Storage

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×10 Lawn Equipment Storage | Steel and Stud, From $1,500

12

10×10 Lawn Equipment Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$1,700$1,500SAVE $200
or $31/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×10Lawn Equipment Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×10 Lawn Equipment Storage, built for daily backyard use.

Riding mower, push mower, trimmer, blower, gas cans, and a fertilizer spreader all fit with a 10×10 roll-up door for drive-in access. Concrete pad keeps tires clean; ground anchor option works if you’re saving the slab.

You’re viewing:Lawn Equipment Storage·Size10×10·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$1,500$1,700Save $200
or as low as $31/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×10
10×10
this size
$1,500
10×12
longer
$1,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 100 sq ft enclosed
  • 10×8 Roll-Up
  • Ground Anchors
  • 29 GA Panels
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X10-LAWN-EQUIPMENT-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 10×10 lawn equipment storage.

10 feet wide × 10 feet long. Riding mower, push mower, trimmer, blower, gas cans, and a fertilizer spreader all fit with a 10×10 roll-up door for drive-in access.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack10′ × 10′ · 100 sq ft shop

Lawn Equipment Storage layout.

Riding mower, push mower, trimmer, blower, gas cans, and a fertilizer spreader all fit with a 10×10 roll-up door for drive-in access. Concrete pad keeps tires clean; ground anchor option works if you’re saving the slab pour for next year.

💡 Pro tip:Lawn Equipment Storage works well at 10×10, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×10 Lawn Equipment Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Lawn Equipment Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×10 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Lawn Equipment Storage spec sheet.

Width10′
Length10′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Lawn Equipment Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday lawn equipment storage
Everyday lawn equipment storage
100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a lawn equipment storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWlawn equipment storage + seasonal storage
lawn equipment storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×10 Lawn Equipment Storage, what makes it different.

100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$31/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×10 lawn equipment storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $31/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×10?

100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 10′ footprint with 100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $800–$1,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Lawn Equipment Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×10 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×10 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×10 Lawn Equipment Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×10 Lawn Equipment Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Lawn Equipment Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×11×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$450+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Lawn Equipment Storage also viewed:

🏡 10×10

Backyard Storage Shed

10×10 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 10×10

Garden Building with Window

10×10 garden building with window configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Building with Window →

🎯 10×10

Carport for Single Vehicle

10×10 carport for single vehicle configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Single Vehicle →

🏡 10×10

Tool Shed for Hobbyists

10×10 tool shed for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Hobbyists →

🎯 10×10

Motorcycle & ATV Garage

10×10 motorcycle & atv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Garage →

🏡 10×10

Pool Equipment House

10×10 pool equipment house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment House →

🏡 10×10

Backyard Home Office

10×10 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 10×10

She-Shed / Hobby Room

10×10 she-shed / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Hobby Room →

🌾 10×10

Chicken Coop Shelter

10×10 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🏢 10×10

Job-Site Tool Storage

10×10 job-site tool storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Job-Site Tool Storage →

🌾 10×10

Feed & Hay Storage

10×10 feed & hay storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Hay Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Lawn Equipment Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 10×10 lawn equipment storage cost?

A 10×10 lawn equipment storage from Steel and Stud starts at $1,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $31/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×10 lawn equipment storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud lawn equipment storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×10 lawn equipment storage?

Almost always for 100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud lawn equipment storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×10 lawn equipment storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×10 lawn equipment storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×10 lawn equipment storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $31/month on a 10×10 lawn equipment storage.

What warranty comes with the 10×10 lawn equipment storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×10 lawn equipment storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 10×10 lawn equipment storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 10×10 lawn equipment storage typically adds $800–$1,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Lawn Equipment Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$1,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White steel garage at dusk with black roll-up door as a rider walks his Harley

10×10 Lawn Equipment Storage

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$1,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Gray steel building with black roll-up door and orange Kubota tractor on a gravel pad

10×10 Job-Site Tool Storage

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×10 Job-Site Tool Storage | Steel and Stud, From $3,350

12

10×10 Job-Site Tool Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$3,800$3,350SAVE $450
or $70/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×10Job-Site Tool Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×10 Job-Site Tool Storage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Contractors buy a 10×10 steel building kit for on-site tool security between phases of a long build. Heavy-duty slide bolt, deadbolt, and a Knox box option lock down generators, compressors, and copper. Disassembles for.

You’re viewing:Job-Site Tool Storage·Size10×10·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$3,350$3,800Save $450
or as low as $70/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×10
10×10
this size
$3,350
10×12
longer
$3,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 100 sq ft enclosed
  • Deadbolt
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Re-Locatable
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X10-JOB-SITE-TOOL-STBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 10×10 job-site tool storage.

10 feet wide × 10 feet long. Contractors buy a 10×10 steel building kit for on-site tool security between phases of a long build.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP10′ × 10′ · 100 sq ft

Job-Site Tool Storage layout.

Contractors buy a 10×10 steel building kit for on-site tool security between phases of a long build. Heavy-duty slide bolt, deadbolt, and a Knox box option lock down generators, compressors, and copper. Disassembles for the next job.

💡 Pro tip:Job-Site Tool Storage works well at 10×10, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×10 Job-Site Tool Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Job-Site Tool Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×10 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Job-Site Tool Storage spec sheet.

Width10′
Length10′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Job-Site Tool Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday job-site tool storage
Everyday job-site tool storage
100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a job-site tool storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWjob-site tool storage + seasonal storage
job-site tool storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×10 Job-Site Tool Storage, what makes it different.

100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$70/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×10 job-site tool storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $70/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×10?

100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 10′ footprint with 100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $800–$1,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Job-Site Tool Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×10 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×10 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×10 Job-Site Tool Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×10 Job-Site Tool Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Job-Site Tool Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×11×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$450+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Job-Site Tool Storage also viewed:

🏡 10×10

Backyard Storage Shed

10×10 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 10×10

Garden Building with Window

10×10 garden building with window configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Building with Window →

🎯 10×10

Carport for Single Vehicle

10×10 carport for single vehicle configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Single Vehicle →

🏡 10×10

Tool Shed for Hobbyists

10×10 tool shed for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Hobbyists →

🎯 10×10

Motorcycle & ATV Garage

10×10 motorcycle & atv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Garage →

🏡 10×10

Pool Equipment House

10×10 pool equipment house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment House →

🏡 10×10

Backyard Home Office

10×10 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 10×10

She-Shed / Hobby Room

10×10 she-shed / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Hobby Room →

🌾 10×10

Chicken Coop Shelter

10×10 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🏡 10×10

Lawn Equipment Storage

10×10 lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Storage →

🌾 10×10

Feed & Hay Storage

10×10 feed & hay storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Hay Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Job-Site Tool Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 10×10 job-site tool storage cost?

A 10×10 job-site tool storage from Steel and Stud starts at $3,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $70/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×10 job-site tool storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud job-site tool storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×10 job-site tool storage?

Almost always for 100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud job-site tool storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×10 job-site tool storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×10 job-site tool storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×10 job-site tool storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $70/month on a 10×10 job-site tool storage.

What warranty comes with the 10×10 job-site tool storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×10 job-site tool storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 10×10 job-site tool storage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Job-Site Tool Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$3,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Gray steel building with black roll-up door and orange Kubota tractor on a gravel pad

10×10 Job-Site Tool Storage

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$3,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Woodgrain metal carport with black frame sheltering a pickup truck and SUV

10×10 Feed & Hay Storage

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×10 Feed & Hay Storage | Steel and Stud, From $2,150

12

10×10 Feed & Hay Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$2,450$2,150SAVE $300
or $45/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×10Feed & Hay Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×10 Feed & Hay Storage, built for farm and ranch demands.

Small property owners with goats, horses, or backyard livestock store 30-40 bales of hay plus feed bins under a sealed steel roof. Vapor-barrier insulation keeps moisture off the bales. Sliding barn door reads.

You’re viewing:Feed & Hay Storage·Size10×10·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$2,150$2,450Save $300
or as low as $45/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×10
10×10
this size
$2,150
10×12
longer
$2,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 100 sq ft enclosed
  • Sliding Barn Door
  • Vapor Barrier
  • Vented Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X10-FEED-HAY-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 10×10 feed & hay storage.

10 feet wide × 10 feet long. Small property owners with goats, horses, or backyard livestock store 30-40 bales of hay plus feed bins under a sealed steel roof.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP10′ × 10′ · 100 sq ft

Feed & Hay Storage layout.

Small property owners with goats, horses, or backyard livestock store 30-40 bales of hay plus feed bins under a sealed steel roof. Vapor-barrier insulation keeps moisture off the bales. Sliding barn door reads farm-style and clears bulk loads.

💡 Pro tip:Feed & Hay Storage works well at 10×10, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×10 Feed & Hay Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Feed & Hay Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×10 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Feed & Hay Storage spec sheet.

Width10′
Length10′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Feed & Hay Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday feed & hay storage
Everyday feed & hay storage
100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a feed & hay storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfeed & hay storage + seasonal storage
feed & hay storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×10 Feed & Hay Storage, what makes it different.

100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$45/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×10 feed & hay storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $45/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×10?

100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 10′ footprint with 100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $800–$1,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Feed & Hay Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×10 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×10 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×10 Feed & Hay Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×10 Feed & Hay Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Feed & Hay Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×11×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$450+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Feed & Hay Storage also viewed:

🏡 10×10

Backyard Storage Shed

10×10 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 10×10

Garden Building with Window

10×10 garden building with window configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Building with Window →

🎯 10×10

Carport for Single Vehicle

10×10 carport for single vehicle configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport for Single Vehicle →

🏡 10×10

Tool Shed for Hobbyists

10×10 tool shed for hobbyists configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed for Hobbyists →

🎯 10×10

Motorcycle & ATV Garage

10×10 motorcycle & atv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Garage →

🏡 10×10

Pool Equipment House

10×10 pool equipment house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment House →

🏡 10×10

Backyard Home Office

10×10 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 10×10

She-Shed / Hobby Room

10×10 she-shed / hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Hobby Room →

🌾 10×10

Chicken Coop Shelter

10×10 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🏡 10×10

Lawn Equipment Storage

10×10 lawn equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Storage →

🏢 10×10

Job-Site Tool Storage

10×10 job-site tool storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Job-Site Tool Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Feed & Hay Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 10×10 feed & hay storage cost?

A 10×10 feed & hay storage from Steel and Stud starts at $2,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $45/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×10 feed & hay storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud feed & hay storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×10 feed & hay storage?

Almost always for 100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud feed & hay storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×10 feed & hay storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×10 feed & hay storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×10 feed & hay storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $45/month on a 10×10 feed & hay storage.

What warranty comes with the 10×10 feed & hay storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×10 feed & hay storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 10×10 feed & hay storage stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Feed & Hay Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Woodgrain metal carport with black frame sheltering a pickup truck and SUV

10×10 Feed & Hay Storage

100 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 10′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×10 steel building delivers 100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Khaki metal garage with black roll-up door and wainscot overlooking a calm lake

20×32 Two-Car Detached Garage

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×32 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×32 Two-Car Detached Garage | Steel and Stud, From $9,450

12

20×32 Two-Car Detached Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,750$9,450SAVE $1,300
or $197/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×32Two-Car Detached Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×32 Two-Car Detached Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Homeowners outgrowing a single-car shed pick the 20×32 because two F-150s park nose-to-tail with 8 feet of bench space behind them. Spec a 20×32 roll-up plus a 20×32 walk-in for daily access. The 12-foot leg height.

You’re viewing:Two-Car Detached Garage·Size20×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,450$10,750Save $1,300
or as low as $197/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×32
20×31
smaller
$9,150
20×32
this size
$9,450
20×35
longer
$10,350
24×32
wider
$11,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 640 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • 9×8 Roll-Up
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X32-TWO-CAR-DETACHEDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×32 two-car detached garage.

20 feet wide × 32 feet long. Homeowners outgrowing a single-car shed pick the 20×32 because two F-150s park nose-to-tail with 8 feet of bench space behind them.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area20′ × 32′ · 640 sq ft

Two-Car Detached Garage layout.

Homeowners outgrowing a single-car shed pick the 20×32 because two F-150s park nose-to-tail with 8 feet of bench space behind them. Spec a 20×32 roll-up plus a 20×32 walk-in for daily access. The 12-foot leg height clears a lifted truck or roof rack.

💡 Pro tip:Two-Car Detached Garage works well at 20×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×32 Two-Car Detached Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Two-Car Detached Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
640 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Two-Car Detached Garage spec sheet.

Width20′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space640 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Two-Car Detached Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday two-car detached garage
Everyday two-car detached garage
640 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a two-car detached garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtwo-car detached garage + seasonal storage
two-car detached garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×32 Two-Car Detached Garage, what makes it different.

640sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$197/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×32 two-car detached garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $197/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×32?

640 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 32′ footprint with 640 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,120–$7,680 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Two-Car Detached Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×32 Two-Car Detached Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×32 Two-Car Detached Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Two-Car Detached Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,880+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Two-Car Detached Garage also viewed:

🏡 20×32

Metal Workshop with Bench Bay

20×32 metal workshop with bench bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop with Bench Bay →

🎯 20×32

Single-Bay RV Cover

20×32 single-bay rv cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Bay RV Cover →

🌾 20×32

Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack)

20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack) →

🏡 20×32

Garage + Storage Combo

20×32 garage + storage combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage + Storage Combo →

🏢 20×32

Commercial Storage Building

20×32 commercial storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Storage Building →

🎯 20×32

Man Cave / Hangout

20×32 man cave / hangout configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / Hangout →

🏡 20×32

She Shed / Studio

20×32 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🏢 20×32

Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay

20×32 auto detail / mechanic bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay →

🌾 20×32

Equipment & Tractor Shed

20×32 equipment & tractor shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Tractor Shed →

🏭 20×32

Light Fabrication Shop

20×32 light fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Light Fabrication Shop →

🏛️ 20×32

Community / Church Storage

20×32 community / church storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Church Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Two-Car Detached Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×32 two-car detached garage cost?

A 20×32 two-car detached garage from Steel and Stud starts at $9,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $197/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×32 two-car detached garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud two-car detached garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×32 two-car detached garage?

Almost always for 640+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud two-car detached garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×32 two-car detached garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×32 two-car detached garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×32 two-car detached garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $197/month on a 20×32 two-car detached garage.

What warranty comes with the 20×32 two-car detached garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×32 two-car detached garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×32 two-car detached garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×32 two-car detached garage typically adds $5,120–$7,680 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Two-Car Detached Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Khaki metal garage with black roll-up door and wainscot overlooking a calm lake

20×32 Two-Car Detached Garage

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×32 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White metal workshop with black roll-up door and wainscot against a mountain backdrop

20×32 Metal Workshop with Bench Bay

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×32 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×32 Metal Workshop with Bench Bay | Steel and Stud, From $9,450

12

20×32 Metal Workshop with Bench Bay
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,750$9,450SAVE $1,300
or $197/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×32Metal Workshop with Bench Bay

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×32 Metal Workshop with Bench Bay, built for daily backyard use.

Tradespeople and weekend builders use the back 12 feet for a workbench wall and the front 20 feet for a vehicle pull-in. R-19 batt insulation and a 20×32 window keep it usable year-round. Wire it 100-amp and you’ve got.

You’re viewing:Metal Workshop with Bench Bay·Size20×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,450$10,750Save $1,300
or as low as $197/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×32
20×31
smaller
$9,150
20×32
this size
$9,450
20×35
longer
$10,350
24×32
wider
$11,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 640 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 12 GA Upgrade
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X32-METAL-WORKSHOP-BBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×32 metal workshop with bench bay.

20 feet wide × 32 feet long. Tradespeople and weekend builders use the back 12 feet for a workbench wall and the front 20 feet for a vehicle pull-in.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP20′ × 32′ · 640 sq ft

Metal Workshop with Bench Bay layout.

Tradespeople and weekend builders use the back 12 feet for a workbench wall and the front 20 feet for a vehicle pull-in. R-19 batt insulation and a 20×32 window keep it usable year-round. Wire it 100-amp and you’ve got a real shop, not a parking garage.

💡 Pro tip:Metal Workshop with Bench Bay works well at 20×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×32 Metal Workshop with Bench Bay in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Metal Workshop with Bench Bay.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
640 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Metal Workshop with Bench Bay spec sheet.

Width20′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space640 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Metal Workshop with Bench Bay.

DAILY USEEveryday metal workshop with bench bay
Everyday metal workshop with bench bay
640 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a metal workshop with bench bay.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmetal workshop with bench bay + seasonal storage
metal workshop with bench bay + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×32 Metal Workshop with Bench Bay, what makes it different.

640sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$197/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×32 metal workshop with bench bay is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $197/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×32?

640 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 32′ footprint with 640 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,120–$7,680 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Metal Workshop with Bench Bay shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×32 Metal Workshop with Bench Bay buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×32 Metal Workshop with Bench Bay

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Metal Workshop with Bench Bay · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,880+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Metal Workshop with Bench Bay also viewed:

🏡 20×32

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×32 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🎯 20×32

Single-Bay RV Cover

20×32 single-bay rv cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Bay RV Cover →

🌾 20×32

Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack)

20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack) →

🏡 20×32

Garage + Storage Combo

20×32 garage + storage combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage + Storage Combo →

🏢 20×32

Commercial Storage Building

20×32 commercial storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Storage Building →

🎯 20×32

Man Cave / Hangout

20×32 man cave / hangout configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / Hangout →

🏡 20×32

She Shed / Studio

20×32 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🏢 20×32

Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay

20×32 auto detail / mechanic bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay →

🌾 20×32

Equipment & Tractor Shed

20×32 equipment & tractor shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Tractor Shed →

🏭 20×32

Light Fabrication Shop

20×32 light fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Light Fabrication Shop →

🏛️ 20×32

Community / Church Storage

20×32 community / church storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Church Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Metal Workshop with Bench Bay questions, answered.

How much does a 20×32 metal workshop with bench bay cost?

A 20×32 metal workshop with bench bay from Steel and Stud starts at $9,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $197/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×32 metal workshop with bench bay price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud metal workshop with bench bay ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×32 metal workshop with bench bay?

Almost always for 640+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud metal workshop with bench bay different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×32 metal workshop with bench bay need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×32 metal workshop with bench bay delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×32 metal workshop with bench bay without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $197/month on a 20×32 metal workshop with bench bay.

What warranty comes with the 20×32 metal workshop with bench bay?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×32 metal workshop with bench bay in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×32 metal workshop with bench bay add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×32 metal workshop with bench bay typically adds $5,120–$7,680 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Metal Workshop with Bench Bay quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White metal workshop with black roll-up door and wainscot against a mountain backdrop

20×32 Metal Workshop with Bench Bay

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×32 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green metal carport with open rv bay and enclosed utility room with white door

20×32 Single-Bay RV Cover

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×32 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×32 Single-Bay RV Cover | Steel and Stud, From $9,450

12

20×32 Single-Bay RV Cover
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,750$9,450SAVE $1,300
or $197/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×32Single-Bay RV Cover

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×32 Single-Bay RV Cover, built for hobby and recreational use.

RV owners with Class A or fifth-wheel rigs use the 20×32 carport configuration to clear up to 38-foot coaches with side overhang. The 14-foot leg height fits slide-out awnings and rooftop AC units. Open sides keep.

You’re viewing:Single-Bay RV Cover·Size20×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,450$10,750Save $1,300
or as low as $197/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×32
20×31
smaller
$9,150
20×32
this size
$9,450
20×35
longer
$10,350
24×32
wider
$11,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 640 sq ft enclosed
  • 14′ Leg Height
  • Vertical Roof
  • Open Sides
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X32-SINGLE-BAY-RV-COBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×32 single-bay rv cover.

20 feet wide × 32 feet long. RV owners with Class A or fifth-wheel rigs use the 20×32 carport configuration to clear up to 38-foot coaches with side overhang.

RV BAYDaily Driver20′ × 32′ · 640 sq ft · tall walls

Single-Bay RV Cover layout.

RV owners with Class A or fifth-wheel rigs use the 20×32 carport configuration to clear up to 38-foot coaches with side overhang. The 14-foot leg height fits slide-out awnings and rooftop AC units. Open sides keep airflow; add gable ends to block wind-driven rain.

💡 Pro tip:Single-Bay RV Cover works well at 20×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×32 Single-Bay RV Cover in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Single-Bay RV Cover.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
640 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Single-Bay RV Cover spec sheet.

Width20′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space640 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Single-Bay RV Cover.

DAILY USEEveryday single-bay rv cover
Everyday single-bay rv cover
640 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a single-bay rv cover.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsingle-bay rv cover + seasonal storage
single-bay rv cover + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×32 Single-Bay RV Cover, what makes it different.

640sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$197/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×32 single-bay rv cover is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $197/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×32?

640 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 32′ footprint with 640 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,120–$7,680 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Single-Bay RV Cover shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×32 Single-Bay RV Cover buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×32 Single-Bay RV Cover

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Single-Bay RV Cover · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,880+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Single-Bay RV Cover also viewed:

🏡 20×32

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×32 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×32

Metal Workshop with Bench Bay

20×32 metal workshop with bench bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop with Bench Bay →

🌾 20×32

Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack)

20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack) →

🏡 20×32

Garage + Storage Combo

20×32 garage + storage combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage + Storage Combo →

🏢 20×32

Commercial Storage Building

20×32 commercial storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Storage Building →

🎯 20×32

Man Cave / Hangout

20×32 man cave / hangout configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / Hangout →

🏡 20×32

She Shed / Studio

20×32 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🏢 20×32

Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay

20×32 auto detail / mechanic bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay →

🌾 20×32

Equipment & Tractor Shed

20×32 equipment & tractor shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Tractor Shed →

🏭 20×32

Light Fabrication Shop

20×32 light fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Light Fabrication Shop →

🏛️ 20×32

Community / Church Storage

20×32 community / church storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Church Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Single-Bay RV Cover questions, answered.

How much does a 20×32 single-bay rv cover cost?

A 20×32 single-bay rv cover from Steel and Stud starts at $9,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $197/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×32 single-bay rv cover price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud single-bay rv cover ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×32 single-bay rv cover?

Almost always for 640+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud single-bay rv cover different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×32 single-bay rv cover need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×32 single-bay rv cover delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×32 single-bay rv cover without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $197/month on a 20×32 single-bay rv cover.

What warranty comes with the 20×32 single-bay rv cover?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×32 single-bay rv cover in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 20×32 single-bay rv cover for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a single-bay rv cover to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Single-Bay RV Cover quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green metal carport with open rv bay and enclosed utility room with white door

20×32 Single-Bay RV Cover

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×32 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White metal barn with black roof and three stall doors, black horse in the paddock

20×32 Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack)

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×32 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×32 Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack) | Steel and Stud, From $10,100

12

20×32 Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack)
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$11,500$10,100SAVE $1,400
or $210/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×32Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack)

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×32 Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack), built for farm and ranch demands.

Hobby farmers fit two 20×32 stalls plus an 8-foot tack and feed room into a 20×32 metal barn. Sliding barn doors on the gable end give tractor access; Dutch doors on the long wall let horses out to pasture. Wainscoting.

You’re viewing:Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack)·Size20×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,100$11,500Save $1,400
or as low as $210/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×32
20×31
smaller
$9,800
20×32
this size
$10,100
20×35
longer
$11,000
24×32
wider
$12,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 640 sq ft enclosed
  • Sliding Barn Doors
  • Wainscoting
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X32-HORSE-BARN-2-STABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack).

20 feet wide × 32 feet long. Hobby farmers fit two 20×32 stalls plus an 8-foot tack and feed room into a 20×32 metal barn.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP20′ × 32′ · 640 sq ft

Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack) layout.

Hobby farmers fit two 20×32 stalls plus an 8-foot tack and feed room into a 20×32 metal barn. Sliding barn doors on the gable end give tractor access; Dutch doors on the long wall let horses out to pasture. Wainscoting protects lower walls from kicks.

💡 Pro tip:Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack) works well at 20×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×32 Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack) in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack).

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
640 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack) spec sheet.

Width20′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space640 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack).

DAILY USEEveryday horse barn (2-stall + tack)
Everyday horse barn (2-stall + tack)
640 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a horse barn (2-stall + tack).
STORAGE OVERFLOWhorse barn (2-stall + tack) + seasonal storage
horse barn (2-stall + tack) + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×32 Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack), what makes it different.

640sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$210/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack) is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $210/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×32?

640 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 32′ footprint with 640 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,120–$7,680 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack) shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×32 Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack) buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×32 Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack)

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack) · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,880+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack) also viewed:

🏡 20×32

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×32 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×32

Metal Workshop with Bench Bay

20×32 metal workshop with bench bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop with Bench Bay →

🎯 20×32

Single-Bay RV Cover

20×32 single-bay rv cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Bay RV Cover →

🏡 20×32

Garage + Storage Combo

20×32 garage + storage combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage + Storage Combo →

🏢 20×32

Commercial Storage Building

20×32 commercial storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Storage Building →

🎯 20×32

Man Cave / Hangout

20×32 man cave / hangout configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / Hangout →

🏡 20×32

She Shed / Studio

20×32 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🏢 20×32

Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay

20×32 auto detail / mechanic bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay →

🌾 20×32

Equipment & Tractor Shed

20×32 equipment & tractor shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Tractor Shed →

🏭 20×32

Light Fabrication Shop

20×32 light fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Light Fabrication Shop →

🏛️ 20×32

Community / Church Storage

20×32 community / church storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Church Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack) questions, answered.

How much does a 20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack) cost?

A 20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack) from Steel and Stud starts at $10,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $210/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack) price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud horse barn (2-stall + tack) ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack)?

Almost always for 640+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud horse barn (2-stall + tack) different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack) need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack) delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack) without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $210/month on a 20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack).

What warranty comes with the 20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack)?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack) in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack) stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack) quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$10,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White metal barn with black roof and three stall doors, black horse in the paddock

20×32 Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack)

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×32 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Gray metal shed with single-slope roof and open side bays on rolling farmland

20×32 Garage + Storage Combo

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×32 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×32 Garage + Storage Combo | Steel and Stud, From $9,450

12

20×32 Garage + Storage Combo
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,750$9,450SAVE $1,300
or $197/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×32Garage + Storage Combo

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×32 Garage + Storage Combo, built for daily backyard use.

Suburban homeowners split the 640 sq ft into a 20×32 single-bay garage and a 20×32 partitioned storage room with its own walk-in door. Steel-stud interior partition included. Perfect for households that need a car, lawn.

You’re viewing:Garage + Storage Combo·Size20×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,450$10,750Save $1,300
or as low as $197/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×32
20×31
smaller
$9,150
20×32
this size
$9,450
20×35
longer
$10,350
24×32
wider
$11,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 640 sq ft enclosed
  • Interior Partition
  • 2 Walk-In Doors
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X32-GARAGE-STORAGE-CBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×32 garage + storage combo.

20 feet wide × 32 feet long. Suburban homeowners split the 640 sq ft into a 20×32 single-bay garage and a 20×32 partitioned storage room with its own walk-in door.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area20′ × 32′ · 640 sq ft

Garage + Storage Combo layout.

Suburban homeowners split the 640 sq ft into a 20×32 single-bay garage and a 20×32 partitioned storage room with its own walk-in door. Steel-stud interior partition included. Perfect for households that need a car, lawn gear, and seasonal bins separated.

💡 Pro tip:Garage + Storage Combo works well at 20×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×32 Garage + Storage Combo in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Garage + Storage Combo.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
640 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Garage + Storage Combo spec sheet.

Width20′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space640 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Garage + Storage Combo.

DAILY USEEveryday garage + storage combo
Everyday garage + storage combo
640 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a garage + storage combo.
STORAGE OVERFLOWgarage + storage combo + seasonal storage
garage + storage combo + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×32 Garage + Storage Combo, what makes it different.

640sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$197/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×32 garage + storage combo is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $197/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×32?

640 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 32′ footprint with 640 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,120–$7,680 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Garage + Storage Combo shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×32 Garage + Storage Combo buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×32 Garage + Storage Combo

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Garage + Storage Combo · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,880+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Garage + Storage Combo also viewed:

🏡 20×32

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×32 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×32

Metal Workshop with Bench Bay

20×32 metal workshop with bench bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop with Bench Bay →

🎯 20×32

Single-Bay RV Cover

20×32 single-bay rv cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Bay RV Cover →

🌾 20×32

Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack)

20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack) →

🏢 20×32

Commercial Storage Building

20×32 commercial storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Storage Building →

🎯 20×32

Man Cave / Hangout

20×32 man cave / hangout configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / Hangout →

🏡 20×32

She Shed / Studio

20×32 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🏢 20×32

Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay

20×32 auto detail / mechanic bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay →

🌾 20×32

Equipment & Tractor Shed

20×32 equipment & tractor shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Tractor Shed →

🏭 20×32

Light Fabrication Shop

20×32 light fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Light Fabrication Shop →

🏛️ 20×32

Community / Church Storage

20×32 community / church storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Church Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Garage + Storage Combo questions, answered.

How much does a 20×32 garage + storage combo cost?

A 20×32 garage + storage combo from Steel and Stud starts at $9,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $197/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×32 garage + storage combo price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud garage + storage combo ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×32 garage + storage combo?

Almost always for 640+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud garage + storage combo different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×32 garage + storage combo need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×32 garage + storage combo delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×32 garage + storage combo without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $197/month on a 20×32 garage + storage combo.

What warranty comes with the 20×32 garage + storage combo?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×32 garage + storage combo in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×32 garage + storage combo add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×32 garage + storage combo typically adds $5,120–$7,680 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Garage + Storage Combo quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Gray metal shed with single-slope roof and open side bays on rolling farmland

20×32 Garage + Storage Combo

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×32 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Black open-front metal shed with single-slope roof and wood posts beside a pond

20×32 Commercial Storage Building

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×32 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×32 Commercial Storage Building | Steel and Stud, From $11,300

12

20×32 Commercial Storage Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,900$11,300SAVE $1,600
or $235/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×32Commercial Storage Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×32 Commercial Storage Building, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Small-business owners use the 20×32 as inventory storage, contractor lockup, or dry-goods overflow. A 20×32 roll-up handles pallet jacks; 26-gauge walls and 12-gauge frame meet most county commercial code. IBC-compliant.

You’re viewing:Commercial Storage Building·Size20×32·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,300$12,900Save $1,600
or as low as $235/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×32
20×31
smaller
$11,000
20×32
this size
$11,300
20×35
longer
$12,200
24×32
wider
$13,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 640 sq ft enclosed
  • 10×10 Roll-Up
  • 26 GA Walls
  • IBC Certified
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X32-COMMERCIAL-STORABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×32 commercial storage building.

20 feet wide × 32 feet long. Small-business owners use the 20×32 as inventory storage, contractor lockup, or dry-goods overflow.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE20′ × 32′ · 640 sq ft

Commercial Storage Building layout.

Small-business owners use the 20×32 as inventory storage, contractor lockup, or dry-goods overflow. A 20×32 roll-up handles pallet jacks; 26-gauge walls and 12-gauge frame meet most county commercial code. IBC-compliant drawings included for permit submission.

💡 Pro tip:Commercial Storage Building works well at 20×32, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×32 Commercial Storage Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Storage Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
640 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×32 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Storage Building spec sheet.

Width20′
Length32′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space640 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Storage Building.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial storage building
Everyday commercial storage building
640 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial storage building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial storage building + seasonal storage
commercial storage building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×32 Commercial Storage Building, what makes it different.

640sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$235/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×32 commercial storage building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $235/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×32?

640 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 32′ footprint with 640 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,120–$7,680 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Storage Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×32 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×32 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×32 Commercial Storage Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×32 Commercial Storage Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Commercial Storage Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×33×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,880+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Storage Building also viewed:

🏡 20×32

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×32 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×32

Metal Workshop with Bench Bay

20×32 metal workshop with bench bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Workshop with Bench Bay →

🎯 20×32

Single-Bay RV Cover

20×32 single-bay rv cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Bay RV Cover →

🌾 20×32

Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack)

20×32 horse barn (2-stall + tack) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn (2-Stall + Tack) →

🏡 20×32

Garage + Storage Combo

20×32 garage + storage combo configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage + Storage Combo →

🎯 20×32

Man Cave / Hangout

20×32 man cave / hangout configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / Hangout →

🏡 20×32

She Shed / Studio

20×32 she shed / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Studio →

🏢 20×32

Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay

20×32 auto detail / mechanic bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Detail / Mechanic Bay →

🌾 20×32

Equipment & Tractor Shed

20×32 equipment & tractor shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Tractor Shed →

🏭 20×32

Light Fabrication Shop

20×32 light fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Light Fabrication Shop →

🏛️ 20×32

Community / Church Storage

20×32 community / church storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Church Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Storage Building questions, answered.

How much does a 20×32 commercial storage building cost?

A 20×32 commercial storage building from Steel and Stud starts at $11,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $235/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×32 commercial storage building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud commercial storage building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×32 commercial storage building?

Almost always for 640+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial storage building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×32 commercial storage building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×32 commercial storage building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×32 commercial storage building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $235/month on a 20×32 commercial storage building.

What warranty comes with the 20×32 commercial storage building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×32 commercial storage building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 20×32 commercial storage building meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Storage Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$11,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Black open-front metal shed with single-slope roof and wood posts beside a pond

20×32 Commercial Storage Building

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 32′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×32 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

Not Sure Which Size? Build Your Carport in 3D and See Your Price Instantly

Flexible Payment Options

3 Ways to Pay - Pick What Works

No need to pay full price today. Choose from standard deposit, easy monthly financing, or rent-to-own with zero credit check. Every option includes free delivery & professional installation.

Monthly Financing

Affordable monthly payments, competitive rates.

Down PaymentVaries by lender
MonthlyAs low as $89/mo
Terms12 to 72 months
Credit CheckRequired
Best ForLarger structures
Check My Rate

Rent-to-Own

No credit check. Low monthly payments.

Down PaymentFirst month only
MonthlyAs low as $49/mo
Terms24 to 60 months
Credit CheckNot required
Best ForBudget-friendly option
Start RTO Application
Instant Estimate

RV Covers Price Calculator

Enter your desired dimensions and options below for an instant price estimate. Contact us for a certified, site-specific quote.

ESTIMATED PRICE RANGE $9,200 - $10,300

Estimate based on standard configuration. Contact us for exact certified pricing.

View Presets, Inventory Matches & Details

Presets & Calculator Data

Custom estimate

Enter a size and state to generate an estimated range and route correctly.

Size Selected 24 × 40 × 10
Floor Area 960 sq ft
Location FactorStandard
Inventory MatchNo exact match
Recommended Path3D Builder

Inventory Alternatives

4-8 Weeks Current Lead Time — 127 Carports Ordered This Month Alone

Why Steel and Stud

6 Reasons to Choose a Steel Carport

A prefabricated steel carport is the most cost-effective way to protect your vehicles, boats and equipment. Here is why 15,000+ property owners chose Steel and Stud.

🧮

Free Installation Included

Every tubular steel carport order includes free professional installation by a certified crew across all 48 contiguous states. No hidden assembly fees. Just confirm your site is level and we handle the rest.

🌟

20-Year Warranty on 12-Gauge

Our 12-gauge galvanized steel frames carry a 20-year limited rust-through warranty backed by the manufacturer. 14-gauge frames include a full workmanship warranty. Steel structures genuinely last decades.

💰

Factory-Direct Pricing

We work directly with multiple manufacturers, cutting out distributor markups. In most cases our prices beat the manufacturer's own direct pricing. 40-60% less than comparable wood or concrete construction.

🌞

12 Color Options Included

Choose from 12 standard powder-coat colors at no additional cost. Galvanized and primer finishes also available. Your color choice will not affect your price or lead time.

Engineered for Your Climate

All structures are designed to meet local wind speed and snow load requirements. 12-gauge certified frames are available for high-wind coastal zones, heavy-snow mountain regions and tornado-prone states.

🔭

Multiple Manufacturers, One Source

We partner with multiple vetted manufacturers nationwide so you always get the closest installer, the fastest lead time, and competitive pricing for your specific location and climate zone.

Choose the Right Roof

Regular vs A-Frame vs Vertical Roof Carport

Selecting the right roof style affects weather performance, aesthetics, price and longevity. Here is how each option compares across key factors.

Regular / Horizontal

Most affordable, simple design

Lowest starting price
Fastest lead time
Moderate rain and snow shedding
Horizontal roof panels
Not ideal for heavy snow areas
Best for mild climates

Vertical Roof

Best performance, highest durability

Superior snow and rain shedding
Panels run vertically top-to-bottom
No standing water or debris ponding
Ideal for heavy snow regions
Price premium (+15%)
Recommended for all climates
Verified Reviews

What Our customers Say

Real customers, real installs. See why 15,000+ property owners chose Steel and Stud for their RV Covers.

★★★★★
4.8 out of 5 based on 2,847 verified customer reviews
★★★★★

"Excellent to deal with — I feel fortunate Bill answered the phone when I called. He kept me informed of the order status from purchase through installation. Pleased with the quality and I would not hesitate buying again."

RB
Returning Buyer
Verified Customer
Steel Carport
★★★★★

"Bill is a hard charger when it comes to customer service. I was amazed how quickly he returned my emails and phone calls, and followed up with the installation from start to finish. Highly recommend."

VB
Verified Buyer
Verified Customer
Custom Metal Building
★★★★★

"Bill was very helpful with the sales portion of my order — communication promptly answered, straightforward about delivery. The installation team were professional and met every challenge head on. A well-prepared site is key; I'm thankful for his advice on that."

VB
Verified Buyer
Verified Customer
Steel Carport
Common Questions

RV Covers FAQ

Everything you need to know before ordering your steel carport: pricing, installation, permits, warranties, anchoring and dimensions.

Although this can be done with one person, we recommend having at least two people on hand to ensure safety. You can enlist the help of as many people as you like. All tubular steel orders from Steel and Stud include professional installation by a certified crew, so you do not need to self-install unless you specifically choose a DIY kit.

Carports and More Inc. has manufacturers that install in 48 contiguous states. Parts of some states are not covered by the manufacturer used for online pricing. If an order is placed and your location is not in a covered area, we will call you with the correct pricing for your area before proceeding.

Absolutely. You can install the building yourself. In most states, there is a 5% discount for self-installed buildings. The materials can be delivered to your location or picked up at the nearest factory. Contact us for current availability and self-install options in your state.

Manufacturers aim to install units within a 4-week period from the time an approved order is received. In some cases it is done sooner; however, it can take longer depending on the time of year, your location, and seasonal demand. Areas with extreme winter weather may close temporarily. Buildings over 24 feet wide require special construction and can take longer to manufacture.

Most standard RV Covers units are constructed in just a few hours. It may take up to two days depending on the size and complexity of the building. Large triple-wide or commercial-span RV Covers may require a second day for proper installation and inspection.

The key to a successful installation is a flat, level surface. Site preparation and building permits are the responsibility of the customer. You have approximately 2 to 3 inches of adjustment available during installation to account for minor grade differences. If your lot is significantly out of level, materials to level the site must be on hand when the crew arrives.

Re-bar and pin anchors (1/2-inch diameter, 36-inch long) are included for ground and asphalt installations. Concrete anchor bolts are used on concrete slabs at no extra charge. Mobile home auger anchors are available for ground installation at an additional cost. In several states, units enclosed on three sides require a minimum of four mobile home augers for ground installations.

Yes. You have 12 standard colors to choose from at no additional charge. Color selection does not affect your price. Galvanized and primer finishes are also available. Your color selection is made at the time of order and cannot be changed after fabrication begins.

Permit requirements vary by city, county and state. You should contact your local building department before ordering. All permit requirements such as set-backs must be resolved before ordering because once engineering plans are sent, your deposit becomes non-refundable. Generic engineered plans are available in most states. States requiring building-specific plans and calculations include CO, ID, MT, ND, NE, NJ, OR, SD, UT, WA and WY. Contact us if you have questions about your area.

The vertical roof allows water, snow and debris to run off quickly without ponding. The vertical panel orientation prevents accumulation and is especially recommended in high snow-load areas. If you are in a state with significant annual snowfall or heavy seasonal rain, the vertical roof upgrade is strongly recommended even though it carries a modest price premium.

Sizes are shown as width x length x leg height. Width is measured from outside to outside of each base rail. Length is measured by the roof metal, which includes a 6-inch overhang on each end, so the base rail is 1 foot shorter than the roof length. Height is measured by the actual leg on the outer wall. Standard-style roof units will be 1 foot taller at the sidewall than the selected leg height.

The frames are available in either 14-gauge or 12-gauge galvanized steel tubing. The roof, side and end panels are 29-gauge steel with a painted finish. Galvanized frames provide corrosion resistance. 12-gauge is 2.5mm thick; 14-gauge is 1.9mm thick. Lower gauge equals thicker, stronger steel.

14-gauge frame units carry a 30-day workmanship warranty. 12-gauge frames include both the 30-day workmanship warranty and a 20-year limited rust-through warranty on the framing, assuming normal user care and maintenance. Warranty coverage begins on the date of installation.

Yes; however, your deposit may not be fully refundable. You have 3 days from the date of order confirmation to cancel and receive a full refund. Cancellations must be in writing. After 3 days, deposits may be applied as credit toward any future purchase within 3 years. Deposits on custom-size units are non-refundable. Installation timing delays alone are not a valid reason for cancellation.

No. In most cases our prices are the same as or lower than ordering direct from the manufacturer. We work with multiple manufacturers and can often source your structure from the most competitive option for your location, size and timing, something a single manufacturer cannot do for you.

Yes. Extensions, lean-tos, sidewalls and doors can be added after installation, though there may be an additional service charge. If you plan to eventually enclose a RV Covers with walk-in or roll-up doors, your original leg height must be 6 feet or taller to allow for standard door frames.

Slab requirements vary by manufacturer. Please contact us before pouring your concrete slab to confirm exact dimensions and anchor bolt placement for your specific RV Covers model. Pouring the wrong size slab can delay installation.

12-foot legs are standard and available on all units. Longer legs may be available for special applications such as RV clearance or commercial-height requirements. Contact us if you need legs taller than 12 feet and we will confirm availability for your chosen structure type.

The balance due is paid directly to the manufacturer after your RV Covers is fully installed and you are satisfied. The manufacturer accepts cash, check and credit card. They will confirm accepted payment methods when they contact you to schedule installation. PayPal is not accepted directly by the manufacturer but can be arranged through Steel and Stud with applicable processing fees. If you prefer not to pay the full balance at once, ask about our monthly financing or rent-to-own (RTO) options — both are available and let you own your RV Covers with as little as the first month's payment down.

Yes — Steel and Stud offers three flexible payment paths: (1) Standard Payment — pay a deposit now, balance after install, zero interest; (2) Monthly Financing — competitive rates from $89/mo over 12–72 months with a soft credit pull; and (3) Rent-to-Own (RTO) — as low as $49/mo with no credit check required, first month's payment as the only down payment, and an early buyout option available at any time. RTO is available on most residential RV Covers sizes. View all financing options →

Gauge refers to the thickness of the steel tubing: lower gauge means thicker steel. 12-gauge is 2.5mm thick and is the stronger, more durable option backed by a 20-year rust-through warranty. 14-gauge is 1.9mm thick, lighter and more affordable, carrying a 30-day workmanship warranty. For heavy snow loads, high winds or long-term investment, 12-gauge is always recommended.

Standard single-car RV Covers (12x21, 15x21) start at $1,195 with free delivery and installation on tubular steel orders. Two-car RV Covers (18x21, 20x21) range from $1,595 to $2,595 depending on roof style and gauge. Triple-wide RV Covers (24x29 and larger) start around $3,895. Large commercial spans (20x38+, 24x45+) start at $5,195 and up. Contact us for a precise quote including your location, size and options.

Get Your Free Quote

Request a Free Carport Quote

Tell us about your project and a building specialist will contact you within 2 hours with a personalized, no-obligation price quote.

Why Request a Quote?

Fast ResponseAverage response time under 2 hours. Most quotes same day.
No Hidden FeesYour quote includes all standard features. Tubular orders include delivery and installation.
Low Deposit to StartDeposit varies by project scope. Balance due only after installation.
Zero ObligationGet your quote, compare options, decide when you are ready.
1-877-275-7048 Mon to Fri 8AM to 6PM EST

RV Covers Sizes and Dimensions Guide

RV Covers dimensions follow a standard width x length x leg height format. Width runs from 10 feet to 40 feet for standard tubular steel units. Length is effectively unlimited in increments. Leg height starts at 6 feet for standard single-car RV Covers and goes up to 12 feet as a standard option, with taller legs available on request.

Single-car RV Covers (12 to 15 feet wide, 21 feet long) are the most affordable option starting at $1,195. Two-car RV Covers (18 to 22 feet wide) are the most popular category, covering two standard vehicles with room to open doors. Triple-wide RV Covers (24+ feet wide) accommodate three vehicles, trucks, boats or large equipment.

When planning your site, remember that the base rail is 1 foot shorter than the roof length due to 6-inch overhangs on each end. If you need exactly 40 feet of enclosed coverage, order a 41-foot length RV Covers. Contact our team to confirm the right dimensions before ordering.

How Much Does a RV Covers Cost in 2026?

RV Covers prices in 2026 range from $1,195 for a basic 12x21 single-car RV Covers up to $9,000 or more for a large 30x50 commercial-span structure. All tubular steel RV Covers prices from Steel and Stud include free delivery and professional installation.

Key pricing factors include: Width (wider RV Covers cost more per linear foot), Length (additional bays add proportional cost), Leg Height (taller legs cost more), Roof Style (vertical adds ~15% over regular), and Frame Gauge (12-gauge adds ~12% over 14-gauge but adds a 20-year warranty).

DIY RV Covers kits cost less because installation labor is excluded, but most property owners find the free professional installation included in tubular steel orders to be a significant value. A crew that installs 50 RV Covers per week consistently outperforms a first-time DIY attempt.

RV Covers Installation: What to Expect

After your order is confirmed and your deposit placed, the manufacturer assigns an installation crew for your region. Current lead times run 4 to 8 weeks depending on your location, structure size and seasonal demand. You will be contacted within 60 days of ordering to schedule your installation date.

Site requirements before the crew arrives: a flat, level surface (within 2-3 inches), clear access for a delivery truck, and any permit posted or available. Concrete pads are preferred but not required for ground or gravel installations. The installation crew typically completes a standard single or two-car RV Covers in 3 to 6 hours. Larger triple-wide or tall-clearance units may require a full day.

Balance payment is made directly to the manufacturer after your RV Covers is installed and you are satisfied with the result. Financing and rent-to-own options are available through Steel and Stud for customers who prefer monthly payments. View financing options or request your free quote to get started today.

Related Metal Building Categories

Looking for something larger or more enclosed? Explore our full range: enclosed steel garages from $3,195, metal barns for agricultural use, tall clearance RV and boat covers, barndominium shells for combined living and working space, and all commercial steel building types. Every product category includes the same factory-direct pricing and professional service.

Ready to Protect Your Vehicles with a Steel Carport?

Join 15,000+ property owners who chose Steel and Stud. Factory-direct pricing with free delivery and installation on all tubular steel orders.

View Cart